JP2021186574A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having performance operation of an appropriate performance accessory for executing a highly amusing performance for acquisition of a jackpot game by performance operation of a performance accessory and performance display of a performance display device.SOLUTION: A game machine changes a light emitting mode of a light emitting part of a lower accessory in stages according to a player's button operation in execution of a reverse button step-up performance during a first performance period (normal ready-to-win), and continuously executes a light emitting performance determined as a final light emitting mode of the light emitting part of the lower accessory by the reverse button step-up performance up to predetermined timing (up to occurrence of a winning/losing branching button performance and a chance-up performance) during a second performance period (SP ready-to-win).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 34

Description

Regarding a gaming machine that has a directing character.

Conventionally, in various pachinko gaming machines, as an effect for executing a notification regarding whether or not a big hit game is executed, a display effect such as a notice effect displayed on an effect display device, an effect operation of an effect, a light emission effect, etc. are performed. By using it, the fun of playing and directing is enhanced (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-149364

While gaming machines with various specifications have been developed, there has been a search for motion control and production operation of a production character that is highly interesting to the player and capable of appropriate production.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine provided with a directing object that performs appropriate motion control in order to enhance the interest.

The main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, the effect control means (effect control CPU) that controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and the effect controlled by the effect control means. The device (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), the effect display means (effect display device P80) that is included in the effect device and performs a predetermined effect display, and the effect device. , A gaming machine having an effect movable body (lower accessory P680) capable of executing a predetermined displacement operation, and an effect light emitting unit provided on the effect movable body to execute a predetermined light emission effect, and is a main control. The means executes a winning / failing lottery relating to whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied based on the progress of the game, and the effect control means is the result of the winning / failing lottery. An execution pattern can be selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns including a specific effect pattern as the effect execution pattern according to the above, and the specific effect pattern is the first effect period (for example, normal reach) and the second effect after the first effect period. It is an effect pattern having an effect period (for example, SP reach), and in the first effect period, the first effect period light emission effect (back) that suggests the result of the winning / failing lottery by switching the light emission mode of the effect light emitting unit a plurality of times. It is possible to execute the button step-up effect), and when the light emission effect during the first effect period is executed, until a predetermined timing during the execution of the second effect period (for example, until the winning branch effect during SP reach, or a chance). A gaming machine characterized in that the effect light emitting unit is set to a light emitting mode related to the final light emitting mode of the first effect period light emitting effect) (until the occurrence of an up effect).

It should be noted that any combination of the components according to the above invention, and the components and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media containing computer programs, data structures, and the like. However, the configurations according to the embodiments and modifications described in the embodiments for carrying out the invention are also effective as aspects of the present invention.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a directing object that performs appropriate motion control in order to enhance the interest.

It is a front view of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the front direction in the state where the frame member of the pachinko gaming machine is opened. It is a perspective view in the rear direction in the state where the frame member of the pachinko gaming machine is opened. It is a perspective view which shows the game board attached to the presupposed pachinko machine. It is a functional block diagram of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the transition of the gaming state of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the power-on processing of the main control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the game stop state setting process during the power-on process. It is a figure which shows the interrupt processing of the main control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the winning or failing lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the winning symbol lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern lottery table in the low base state of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern lottery table in the high base state of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the special variation pattern lottery table which is referred to for a limited period of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the power-on processing of the production control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the interrupt processing of the production control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure showing the game effect of the symbol variation display (during the stop display of the decorative symbol) during the normal game (low probability / low base medium) of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing the game production of the situation where the reach production with high expectation that becomes a big hit of the premise pachinko game machine is performed. It is the figure which showed the game production of the state which the big hit game is executed in the presupposed pachinko game machine. It is a figure which showed the game effect during operation of the electric chew support function which is in the specific gaming state (high probability or low probability / high base) of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a front view of the center decoration unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the directing operation of the superior object of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the directing operation of the side object of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the directing operation of the lower part of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the directing operation (second pattern) of the superior object of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation of the production operation means of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process of the initialization / return operation process of the production movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process of the initial position return operation process of the effect movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process of the initial operation confirmation processing of the production movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state and the effect state of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the kind of the special game of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the kind of fluctuation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a production time chart diagram at the time of A reach (off, small hit) of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a production time chart diagram at the time of A reach (big hit) of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a production time chart diagram at the time of B reach (big hit) of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example at the timing (A) in the production time chart at the time of B reach (big hit) of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example at the timing in the production time chart (B) at the time of B reach (big hit) of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. This is an example of the production screen of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the priority of the production display of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the display mode (the beginning of the production) of the battle production A using the production button operation in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the display mode (development when the operation of an effect button is inappropriate) of the battle effect A using the effect button operation in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the display mode (development when the operation of an effect button is appropriate) of the battle effect A using the effect button operation in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the display mode (the final stage of an effect) of the battle effect A using the effect button operation in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment, and the figure which shows the modification. FIG. 1 is an image diagram 1 of a display mode of a battle effect B using an effect button operation in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 2 is an image diagram 2 of a display mode of a battle effect B using an effect button operation in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 3 is an image diagram 3 of a display mode of a battle effect B using an effect button operation in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 4 is an image diagram 4 of a display mode of a battle effect B using an effect button operation in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the display mode of the effect mode selection effect in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the display mode when the left of the cross key is operated in the effect mode selection effect in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the display mode when the right of the cross key is operated in the effect mode selection effect in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment.

(Prerequisite technology)
Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “prerequisite technology”) which is the premise of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As a representative example of the pachinko gaming machine related to the prerequisite technology, the pachinko gaming machine is shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, and the gaming board provided in the pachinko gaming machine is shown in FIG. 4. First, refer to these figures. The machine configuration of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. In the following description, for convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 2 will be referred to as front-back direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction, respectively.

[Machine configuration of pachinko gaming machine]
First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine P will be described. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine P is configured in an outer rectangular shape, and is configured in a square shape on the front surface of the opening of the outer frame P1 fixed in the gaming facility in a size matching the opening of the outer frame P1. The front frames P2 are attached to each other so that they can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached by the upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10 and lower hinge portion 20) arranged on the front left edge portions of each other.

A game board P5 and a glass frame P3 are detachably set on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 has a rectangular shape, and is assembled and held on the front surface side of the front frame P2 so as to be openable / closable and detachable by using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10 and lower hinge portion 20). The game board P5 is detachably set on the front side of the front frame P2, and the game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 is visible to the player through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3 which is closed and held. Has been done. Further, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are rotated in either the left-right direction by inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko gaming machine P, depending on the rotation direction. , The outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked, or the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked. As a specific example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the right, the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the left. Then, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked.

At the lower part of the glass frame P3, upper and lower ball plates P340 (upper ball plate P341 and lower ball plate P342) for storing game balls are provided. Further, the glass frame P3 is provided with a production lamp P350 that emits light according to the development status of the game and a speaker P370 capable of outputting sounds such as sound effects according to the development status of the game. An effect operation unit P380 for performing a predetermined effect operation is attached to the lower center of the glass frame P3, and the effect operation unit P380 possessed by this pachinko gaming machine, which is shown as a prerequisite technology, is a push input type button P381 and a tilt operation. The lever P382 of the type is provided, and the button P381 enables the player to operate at all times, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame movable accessory P360) provided in the glass frame, and the operating means itself. Allows operation input when the lever is displaced upward (input permission state) (multiple operations are possible with the effect operation means of 1).

At the lower right of the front frame P2, a handle P204 for operating the launching of the game ball and adjusting the firing intensity is provided. A launching device unit P240 is further provided in the lower part of the front frame P2, and although not shown, a ball feeding mechanism P241 that sends out game balls stored in the upper ball dish P341 one by one, is sent out from this ball feeding mechanism. A launching device P242 having a launching mechanism (a hammer driven by a rotary solenoid) for launching a game ball toward the game area P501, a launching control board P243 for synchronously controlling the operation of the ball feeding mechanism P241 and the launching device P242, etc. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board P5 (game board unit) is configured based on a base material formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a transparent synthetic resin or wood. Note that FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine P including the gaming board P5 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the gaming board unit P5. FIG. 4 illustrates a state in which the effecting object P560 (also referred to as “movable effecting device”, “effecting movable body”, “effecting movable object”, etc.) provided in the game board unit is operating. On the front surface of the game board P5, an arc-shaped outer rail P502 arranged from the lower left to the upper right part, and a circle arranged from the vicinity of the center of the lower part of the game board to the inner side of the outer rail P502 from the lower left to the upper left part. It is provided with an arc-shaped inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504 arranged between the end of the outer rail P502 in the upper right portion and the lower part of the board surface and formed in a curved shape that opens to the left, and the outer rail P502. A substantially circular game area P501 is formed inside the inner rail P503 and the rail decoration P504. The game area P501 has a left side area P501L (left-handed area), which is a left side area of the center accessory P540, and a right side area of the center accessory, with reference to the center accessory P540 arranged substantially in the center. It has a right side region P501R (right-handed region). Further, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide passage for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the game area P501, along with a large number of game nails P510 and wind turbines P511 (not shown), a first start winning opening P711 (first starting opening), a second starting winning opening P721 (second starting opening), a general winning opening P731, Various ball-entry devices (referred to as "winning devices" when prize balls are generated) such as a normal-figure operating port P741 (general-figure operating gate device) and a large winning opening P751 (attacker) are arranged. It should be noted that the number of large winning openings may be one, or may be configured to have a plurality of large winning openings. Further, in the present specification, due to the configuration of the ball entry device, a game ball is discharged after entering the ball entry device, and a game ball further flows down the game area P501 after entering the ball entry device (gate type). On the other hand, the fact that the game ball is detected by the internal detection switch is called "entry" or "winning (especially the one in which the prize ball is generated)", and it flows down to the downstream game area like a gate type entrance. In particular, there is a case where the description is made separately from "passing". Further, the ball entry device may be referred to as a ball entry slot, and the winning device may be referred to as a winning slot.

Further, in the lower right of the game area P501, there is a main control display device P50 whose lighting is controlled by a main control board described later, such as a first special symbol display device P51, a second special symbol display device P52, and a normal symbol display device P53. Are arranged intensively. A center accessory P540 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the effect display device P80 is visibly provided through the opening of the center accessory P540. At the upper part of the center accessory P540 or the like, a production accessory P560 (movable accessory device) that performs an effect operation according to the development status of the game is provided. At the lower end of the game area P501, an out port P790 through which a game ball that has flowed down without entering the winning opening of various ball entry devices can pass is provided. The game ball that has entered the winning opening of various winning devices or the game ball that has flowed into the out opening P790 flows down to the rear surface side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed by penetrating the game board P5 back and forth. Then, it is collected in the collection flow path (gamed ball passage) at the lower part of the front frame P2 and passes through the out ball sensor P792 (launched ball number sensor) provided at the lower part of the front frame for detecting the total number of fired game balls. After that, it is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine.

The first start winning device P710 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. The first start winning device P710 is provided with a first starting winning opening P711 in which a game ball can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening P711 is an opportunity to acquire a random number used for the lottery related to the first special symbol, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening P711. The lottery for the first special symbol is executed immediately after entering the ball or after the holding period has elapsed.

The second start winning device P720 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. The second start winning device P720 is in a state where it is easy to enter the second start winning opening P721 where a game ball can enter and the second starting winning opening P721 when a normal symbol lottery to be described later is won. An ordinary electric accessory P770, which is a movable body to be switched, is provided. The entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening P721 is a trigger for a random number used in the lottery related to the second special symbol, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening P721. The lottery for the second special symbol is executed immediately after the ball enters or after the holding period has elapsed. The second start winning device P721 is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening P721 or is easily entered by the action of the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening P721. It changes to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball. That is, the second start winning device P720 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening unless it is displaced to the open state, and the predetermined opportunity described later (the opportunity to win the ordinary symbol lottery). When it is in the open state, the ease of entering the game ball increases. It should be noted that the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is known to have various aspects, and the structure may not change the ease of entering the ball by opening the movable body P771, so that it is in an "open state" and a "closed state". "Is described as" easy entry state (easy entry mode) "and" difficult entry state (difficult entry mode) ", respectively.

The general winning device P730 has a left side general winning device P730L arranged in the left-handed area P501L and a right-side general winning device P730R arranged in the right-handed area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P in the present premise technology, the left general winning device P730L is configured with three general winning openings P731La to P731Lc as one unit, while the right general winning device P730R is a large winning device P750 described later. It is configured as part. The entry of a game ball into the general winning opening P731 is an opportunity for the prize ball to be paid out, as with other winning devices. The number and position of the general winning openings P731 of the pachinko gaming machine, which are assumed to be, are merely examples, and may be configured so as to be arranged only in the right-handed region P501R.

The normal-figure operating gate device P740 (normal-figure operating port) is provided as a starting ball entry port corresponding to a normal symbol game. The operating gate device P740 is provided with an operating gate P741 through which a game ball can pass, and the entered game ball is configured to be able to flow further downstream of the game area of the game board. The passage of the game ball to the actuating gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not the second start winning device P720 is opened, that is, whether or not the normal electric accessory P770 is operated. .. As a modification, it is possible to configure the general winning opening P731 to have a function that triggers a normal symbol lottery. In this case, in addition to the function of executing the normal symbol lottery, a prize ball It is also possible to provide a function to generate 1 as a winning device (normal figure operation winning opening).

The large winning device P750 is configured to have a large winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) that opens and closes when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is a big hit or a small hit. It may be called an "attacker (device)" or the like. The large winning device P750 is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the large winning opening P751 or is easy to enter (for example, a state in which the special electric accessory is activated P755) and the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening P751. Alternatively, the ball changes to a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball (for example, the special electric accessory P755 is inactive). In the big hit game, a plurality of round games (unit games) accompanied by an opening / closing operation of the big winning opening P751 are performed. Even when the special electric accessory P755 is operated, the movable body P756 constituting the large winning opening P751 becomes a closed mode in which it is difficult to enter the ball due to a series of operation patterns (also referred to as "open pattern"). Has.

Further, depending on the specifications (specs) of the gaming machine, the large winning device P750 has a specific area P760 (called "V zone" or "V area") through which a game ball can pass, and depending on the function, "probability fluctuation function operation". Areas ”,“ continuation areas ”, etc.) may be provided. The functions related to this "specific area" are (a) to activate the probability fluctuation function (described later) after the big hit game triggered by the passage to the specific area during the big hit game, and (b) to pass through the specific area during the small hit game. To activate the accessory continuous operation device (flag for continuously operating the special electric accessory) and grant the right to execute the jackpot game, (c) Specified in a specific round during the jackpot game. Examples include deterministic or non-execution of subsequent rounds based on whether or not the region has been passed. An opening / closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided in the "specific region", and the flow path can be distributed by the action of the opening / closing member P761. It may be configured to pass through a specific area P760 or a non-specific area other than the specific area P760. Further, during the big hit game or the small hit game, the passage of the game ball in the specific area P761 may have a valid period and an invalid period.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the big prize device P750 is provided in the right side region P501R (right-handed region) in the gaming region P501. Therefore, in the big hit game or the small hit game, when the game ball is launched toward the game area P501, the ball is easily hit into the big winning opening P751 by hitting the right side area P501R. It has become.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, will be described. On the back side of the front frame, a back set unit P4 having a front-rear communication window for attaching the game board unit P5 is attached to the center. A storage tank P401 for storing a large number of game balls supplied from the game facility side, a gutter member P402 for flowing down the game balls from the storage tank P401, and a game ball guided by the gutter member are paid to the back set unit P4. A back passage member P403 for flowing the game ball paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 and the prize ball payout unit P410 to the upper ball plate P341 or the lower ball plate P342 is provided. Further, on the game ball flow path from the storage tank P401 to the ball dish P340, a ball pulling mechanism (ball pulling operation lever P405, a valve member that forms a flow path for removing the game ball from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever). P406) is provided.

On the back side of the game board P5, there is a main control board P40 that comprehensively controls the game progress of the pachinko gaming machine P, and a production control board that controls the overall production according to the game progress accompanying the control of the main control board P40. P41, an image control board P42 that controls image display according to game development, and the like are attached. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present premise technology, the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42 constitute an effect display unit in an assembled state integrated with the effect display device P80 (liquid crystal display device). On the other hand, on the back side of the back set unit P4, there is a payout control board P43 that controls the payout of game balls, and a power supply that receives power from the game facility side and supplies power to various control boards and electric / electronic components. A board P44 (not shown) or the like is attached. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing seal structure, and are in a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board P5 or the back surface of the back set unit P4 in an assembled state. It is arranged in each. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) so that the pachinko gaming machine P can proceed with the game and execute the production. ..

[Function block]
FIG. 5 shows a functional block of a pachinko gaming machine as a premise.

The pachinko gaming machine includes a power supply board P44 that generates a power source to be used in the game machine based on an AC power supply supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control board P40 (main control CPU) that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. ), The payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) as a frame control device for controlling the payout of the prize ball and the launch of the game ball, and the effect control board P41 for controlling the effect operation and processing. It is composed of various forms. The arrows shown in the figure indicate the upper transmission / reception relationship by a solid line arrow and the electrical connection relationship by a broken line arrow for each function.

By operating the power switch P47 provided on the board, the power supply board P44 can be used for the main control board P40, the effect control board P41, the payout control board P43, and various gaming devices electrically connected to them. On the other hand, the electric power required for operation is generated and supplied. Although the details will be described later, since the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is a switch operation that triggers the start of processing of information related to the setting of the gaming machine, the power switch is covered with an open / close cover to prevent unauthorized operation. It is protected in a state of being.

The main control board P40 includes a first starting winning opening P711 (special drawing 1 starting opening switch P712), a second starting winning opening P721 (special drawing 2 starting opening switch P722), a large winning opening P751 (special drawing 2 starting opening switch P752), and a large winning opening P751 (large winning opening switch P752). Detection switch related to various game progress such as normal drawing operation port P741 (normal figure operation port switch P742), general winning opening P731 (left side general winning opening, right side general winning opening), out opening P790, which are other detection switches. It is connected to switches and sensors used for managing various games and monitoring fraud, such as a setting key switch P49, a vibration detection sensor P72, and a magnet sensor P73. The main control board receives information related to the generation of various game states from these switches, determines the control content related to the progress of the game, and is composed of solenoids and the like, and is large in the case of a big hit or a small hit. The special electric accessory driving means P70 driven to expand the winning opening P751 and the ordinary electric accessory P770 driven to make it easy to enter the ball when the ordinary symbol lottery is won. Information related to the driving mode is output to the gaming device such as the driving means P71.

Sensors and the like connected to the main control board P40 are connected to terminals called input ports on the main control board to notify the main control board P40 of the occurrence of various gaming states based on sensor detection as information, and special electric motors are used. The accessory driving means P70, the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71, and other launching permission signals for the launching device P242 are received from terminals called output ports to control each device and device.

Further, the main control board P40 includes special symbol display devices P51 and P52 for displaying variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a round indicator lamp P54 for notifying the type (number of rounds) of a big hit or a small hit, and a gaming state. Main control display device P50 that displays various displays such as the status indicator light P55 that notifies And so on. Regarding the "base value", there are various other accounting methods such as data that excludes winnings such as the starting winning opening P711, etc., but if necessary in the present invention, a separate explanation will be given and it is assumed. Details are omitted in the explanation of the pachinko machine.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to a device outside the gaming machine by means of an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, or the like, and various control signals are transmitted and received to and from each device. Further, the main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the effect control board P41 and the payout control board P43, which are other control boards in the game machine.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of the prize balls by the payout device P410 and the handle P204 by the player based on the prize ball payout transmitted from the main control board P40 and the signal indicating the control state of the main control board. In response to the operation of, the launching device unit P240 controls the launching of the game ball. As an example, the payout device P410 has a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by the rotation of the payout motor P411. The launching device (launching device unit) P240 moves the game balls staying in the ball plate P340 (upper ball plate P341) one by one to a position where they can be launched by the ball feeding unit P241, and then turns the hitting mallet into a game ball. It is configured to launch a game ball by hitting it. The payout control board P43 is provided with a ram clear switch P48 mainly used for initializing the gaming machine and canceling an error generated during the game, and is used for connecting the payout control board P43 and the main control board P40. The operation information of the ram clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness or connector used.

The effect control board P41 includes an effect display device P80, a drive source and a position detection sensor (for example, a drive motor, an initial position detection sensor, and an effect position detection sensor) of the effect movable accessory P560, and a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker). 141), effect operation unit P380 (for example, effect button P381 which is effect operation means P81, effect lever P382, cross key P383, etc.), effect lamp P82 ("decorative lamp", "board lamp (P550)", "frame lamp (P350)". It is also electrically connected to each other and sends and receives various control signals to and from each of them. Further, the effect control board P42 and the effect display device P80 are connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) that controls the display of the effect display device P80 (for example, a device that displays an image such as a liquid crystal display device). It may be something to do. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine that is premised on this, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the effect control board P41, but a voice control board equipped with an IC for voice control or the like is separately provided to provide the speaker P83. It may be configured to control.

Data transmission / reception between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41 is performed in one direction so as to be one direction from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the effect control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40. , I can't request data transmission. Therefore, the effect control board P41 cannot refer to the information generated by the main control board P40 unless the information is transmitted. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of the present invention, data is transmitted / received in both directions between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, as in the case between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41, the data may be transmitted and received in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic game progress]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the pachinko gaming machine P as the prerequisite technology configured as described above will be described for each game state. The "game state" is roughly classified into a "normal game state" and a "special game state" in which it is easier to acquire a game ball as compared with the normal game state. The "normal gaming state" is a state in which the player aims to acquire the right to shift to the "special gaming state", and even in the normal gaming state, there are gaming states in which the degree of advantage for the player regarding the acquisition of the right to shift to the special gaming state is different. A plurality of normal game states are provided, and among a plurality of normal game states, it is more advantageous for the player than a state in which the player can easily acquire the right to shift to the special game state (normal game state (low probability / low base state)). State) is expressed as "specific game state". The "special game state" corresponds to the so-called "big hit game" and "small hit game", and the special electric accessory driving means P70 is driven by the main control board P40, and the big winning opening P751 is opened to acquire the game ball. Means a state in which is easy.

[Normal game state (low probability / low base state)]
First, a game method and a game progress in a normal game state will be described. The normal gaming state described here is a description of the "normal gaming state (low probability / low base state)" (see FIG. 6) excluding the specific gaming state, and is generally in a situation where the player starts the game. The game state will be described, and the game method in the specific game state, the progress of the game, and the meanings of the terms “low (high) probability” and “low (high) base” will be described later.

As a method of gaming in a normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the player first operates the handle P204 to launch a gaming ball toward the gaming area P501 provided on the gaming board P5. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the player fires the operation amount of the handle P204 toward the left side region P501L (left-handed region) of the gaming area. Operate as if to play a game.

When the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L of the game area by the player, the launched game ball flows down the game area P501, and the game nail P510 (also referred to as “obstacle nail” or “navel”) (also referred to as “obstacle nail” or “navel”) or , While displacing the flow direction by the windmill P511, to the first starting winning opening P711 or the general winning opening P731L of the left general winning device, which is arranged at a position substantially below the center in the game area P501 of the game board called "navel". Either enter the ball (winning) or enter the out opening P790 as a gamed game ball without entering any winning opening. When a ball is entered into the first starting winning opening P711 or the general winning opening P731, the main control board P40 causes the payout control board P43 to make the prize balls of the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening (control command). ) Is output, and the player acquires a new game ball by paying out the prize ball.

Here, a special figure 1 start port switch P712 is arranged inside the first start winning opening P711, and as a game state (game result) that can occur when a player shoots a game ball into the left side area P501L in the game area. , When the ball is entered into the first start winning opening P711, the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 starting opening switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives the input of the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start port switch P712, the main control board P40 pays out the game balls of a predetermined number of prize balls and draws a lottery related to the control of the first special symbol. Get the random value to do. The random number value is acquired by acquiring the random number value generated by the random number generation circuit on the electric circuit based on the detection of the game ball (hard latch), or by the control device of the main control board P40 by processing on the software. Techniques such as executing the process of acquiring the random number value from the previous random number generation circuit when confirming the detection information of the game ball, or acquiring the random number value updated by software (soft latch) Yes, it may be used properly according to the random number value to be acquired, or it may be used in combination. In addition, when the ball is entered into the general winning opening, the random number related to the special symbol is not acquired, and only the prize ball is paid out.

The lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", and the "special symbol lottery" includes a "win / fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery". The "win / fail lottery" is a process of determining whether the lottery result using the acquired random value is a "big hit" or a "missing" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result includes a "small hit". ). The "winning symbol lottery" (sometimes simply referred to as "symbol lottery") is a process of determining the display pattern of the stop display symbol indicating the winning / failing lottery result in the special symbol display device P51 (P52) in the main control display device P50. Yes, it is possible to determine one symbol from a plurality of stop display symbols for one lottery result (big hit, small hit), and "big hit" or "small hit" according to the stop display symbol determined here. It is possible to make different execution modes of the special game in. The "variable pattern lottery" is a process of determining at what timing the stop display symbol indicating the result of the winning / failing lottery is displayed on the special symbol display device P51 (P52), and the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device P51 (P52). It determines the time (referred to as "variable display time" or "variable pattern") in which the variable display indicating that the lottery has been executed is made. It is common to use different random numbers for the "win / fail lottery", "winning symbol lottery", and "variable pattern lottery", respectively, and "win / fail lottery random numbers", "symbol random numbers", and "variable patterns". It is called a "random number". The lottery related to the control of the second special symbol performed based on the detection of the game ball of the special figure 2 start port switch P722 is also the same “special symbol lottery”. Further, a description of the "special symbol lottery" will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the game method in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), the player fires a game ball in the left area P501L of the game area. Then, a game ball is inserted into the first start winning opening P711, a lottery related to the first special symbol (special symbol lottery) is executed, and a special symbol indicating "big hit" ("small hit") is shown on the special symbol display device. By displaying the stop display symbol of, the game aiming at the acquisition of the right to execute the special game is performed.

It should be noted that, in the process of receiving the special symbol lottery, the player is described above in that the special symbol is variablely displayed according to the time determined by the variable pattern lottery. If there is a new ball in the starting winning opening (1st starting winning opening P711, 2nd starting winning opening P721) during this special symbol variation display period, a predetermined number of special symbol lottery will be executed. It has a hold function that temporarily stores the random value corresponding to the right. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, it is possible to hold up to four special symbol lottery as a hold function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the prize of the first start winning opening P711. The hold function can be set for each special symbol, and in the pachinko gaming machine P of this prerequisite technology, in addition to the hold of the first special symbol, the hold function of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is also held up to four times. It is possible to reserve the random value used for the special symbol lottery.

As described above, in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the player fires a gaming ball into the left region P501L of the gaming region to execute a special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol. Then, in the special symbol lottery, when the special symbol display device displays that the lottery result of the special gaming state such as "big hit" or "small hit" has been won and the right to shift to the special gaming state has been acquired. , The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine P shifts to the special gaming state.

[Special game status]
Subsequently, the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state will be described. There are "big hit (game)" and "small hit (game)" in the special gaming state, and the special electric accessory P755 operates in both cases, that is, the special electric accessory driving means P70 is operated from the main control board P40. A drive signal is output to the player, and the large winning opening P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The difference is that the "big hit" continuously operates the special electric accessory P755 multiple times. The major difference is that the "small hit" is terminated by the operation of one special electric accessory, while it is based on the operation of the actuating device. As another difference, in the operation of the special electric accessory (big hit) based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, it is possible to make the operation mode of the special electric accessory P755 more advantageous to the player. Specifically, the total opening time of the large winning opening P751 in the operating state (big hit) of the accessory continuous operating device is allowed up to 30 seconds, while the total opening of the large winning opening P751 in the small hit. There is a point that the time is limited to 1.8 seconds. In the following description of the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state, a jackpot will be used as an example.

The game progress of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the prerequisite technology, is called "special game start demo" (in the case of a big hit, "big hit start demo", "role continuous operation start demo", etc., in chronological order. In the case of a hit, there is a production period called "small hit start demo") to notify the player that various special games have been acquired, and one time called "round (game)" (also called "unit game"). The operation period of the special electric accessory P755 and the "special game end demo" (referred to as "big hit end demo" in the case of a big hit, "combination operation end demo", etc., and "small hit end demo" in the case of a small hit. ), Which mainly consists of a game result (such as the number of acquired game balls) during a special game and a period for notifying the type of the normal game state (including a specific game state) of the transition destination.

Next, the method of the game during each of the above-mentioned special games will be described. First, during the "special game start demo" period, in the pachinko game machine P of the prerequisite technology, the large winning opening P751 is arranged in the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and is in the normal game state (low probability / low). Even if the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L similar to the base state), the large winning opening P751 can hardly be expected to enter, so before the round game in which the large winning opening P751 becomes easy to enter in the special game starts. In addition, the display device P80, the speaker (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and the effect lamp produce a right-handed notification effect that urges the player to launch the game ball into the right-hand area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. It is executed using P82. The player adjusts the operation amount of the handle P204 to increase the firing intensity of the game ball according to the right-handed notification effect, and changes the firing position so that the game ball flows down to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. (Perform right-handed).

During the "round (game)" period, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite technology, the large winning opening P751 is in an easy-to-enter state due to a drive signal output from the main control board P40 to the special electric accessory driving means P70. A production that congratulates the player on having a big hit (small hit) according to the execution period of the special game due to difficulty in entering the ball, or a normal game state that shifts after the special game is completed is more advantageous for the player. Perform effects such as effects that suggest whether the game will be in a gaming state. The player launches the game ball into the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the large winning opening P751 and obtain a large number of game balls.

During one "round (game)" period, the opening pattern of the big winning opening (operation mode of the special electric accessory) determined based on the type of big hit (small hit) is completed (opening time elapses). Alternatively, it ends when a predetermined "specified number" (sometimes expressed as "count", "C", etc.) of game balls enters. Then, according to the type of special game state (type of big hit, small hit) being executed, when all the round games to be executed are completed, the state shifts to the state of "special game end demo".

Subsequently, during the "special game end demo" period, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite technology, has the number of game balls acquired during the period of this special game state and multiple times continuously performed during the specific game period described later. A normal game that informs the total number of acquired game balls acquired in the special game state (acquired without shifting to the normal game state (low probability / low base state)) or shifts after the special game state. Notification of the type of state and notification related to the game method in the game state of the transition destination (such as the above-mentioned right-handed notification effect) are executed. The player operates the handle in preparation for the game according to the type of the normal game state of the transition destination from the effect being executed.

In many pachinko gaming machines P that are premised, when a big hit game as a special gaming state is executed, with some exceptions, a special gaming state for a player called a "specific gaming state" as a normal gaming state. It is a game that allows you to enjoy the so-called "renso", in which the right to shift to is easily acquired, and the specific game state and the special game state are continuously repeated.

[Specific game state]
Subsequently, the "specific game state" will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the specific gaming states are roughly divided into three specific gaming states. Then, there are a "probability state" and a "base state" as elements that separate these types, and a specific gaming state is configured by combining them.

(Probability state)
The "probability state" is a probability fluctuation function based on the operating state of the "probability fluctuation function" (also referred to as "probability change"), which is a function of changing the probability that the lottery result becomes a "big hit" in the winning / failing lottery in the special symbol lottery. When the winning / failing lottery in the special symbol lottery becomes a "big hit" with a higher probability than when is activated and not activated, it is expressed as "high probability (state)"("probability change state", "probability fluctuation state"). There is also), and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not operating is expressed as "low probability (state)". The "high probability (state)" is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) in that the probability of winning a big hit for one special symbol lottery is high.

(Base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", that is, the "ratio (expected value) of the game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired", and is generally an ordinary electric accessory. The state in which the operation of P770 is easier (advantageous) than the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) is called "high base (state)" (also referred to as "electric chew support (electric support) state"). .. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, even if the "electric chew support function" is not activated, the recommended firing position of the gaming ball is switched, so that "a prize ball is obtained when a predetermined number of gaming balls are launched." If the "ratio of game balls to be played" increases, it may be expressed as "high base state". "High base (state)" is special while suppressing the consumption of game balls by increasing the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (easily paid out) in the period until the special game state is acquired. It is a gaming state that is advantageous for the player in that it is possible to aim at acquiring the gaming state.

The "electric chew support function" is a state in which the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is easier than in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), but mainly includes a combination of three functions (at least one). ). The three functions that make up the "electric chew support function" are "ordinary symbol probability change", "ordinary symbol time reduction", and "opening extension (of ordinary electric accessory)". "Ordinary symbol probability change" refers to a state in which there is a high probability that an ordinary electric accessory will be activated in the "ordinary symbol lottery". The "ordinary symbol time reduction" refers to a state in which the time from executing the ordinary symbol lottery to displaying the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is shortened in the ordinary symbol display means P53 in the main control display device P50. "Extension of opening of ordinary electric accessory" means that the game ball can easily enter the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory P770 for the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery. It refers to changing to operate, and as an example, it corresponds to extending and lengthening the total time for making a normal electric accessory in an easy-to-enter state.

In the "ordinary symbol lottery", the above-mentioned special symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, whereas in the ordinary symbol lottery, the target is a lottery related to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the lottery. It differs in that the execution trigger is the entry of a game ball into the normal drawing operation gate device P740, but it is almost the same in that the hit / fail, the symbol, and the variation pattern are determined by lottery and the holding function is provided. "Public map" (or "Public map" (or "Public map variable pattern lottery"" such as "Public symbol lottery", "Public symbol lottery", "Public symbol lottery", etc. It is expressed by adding "ordinary pattern") to the beginning.

"Probability state" and "base state" have been described as elements for distinguishing the types of "specific game state", but "time saving state" ("variable time shortening state"" is another element that constitutes the specific game state. , The "variable time reduction function" is activated). In general, the "time saving state" refers to a state in which the variation display time (variation pattern) per special symbol is shortened and the number of executions of the special symbol lottery per unit time increases, which is more for the player. It is in an advantageous state in that many special symbol lottery can be received per unit time. The "time saving state" (variable time shortening state) is often controlled at the same time as the above-mentioned "high probability state" and "electric chew support state", and it is rare that a specific gaming state is configured by itself.

[Specific game state 1: Low probability / High base state]
Returning to the explanation relating to the "specific game state", first, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in FIGS. 6 (1), (8), and (12). The game state transition conditions of (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state, and (b) to elapse the predetermined number of games (* (8). ) Only) and so on. Although not shown, there may be a case where the specific game state 1 shifts to the specific game state 1 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (2), (7), and (11) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (2), (7), and (11) include (c) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 1. (d). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed (* (2) only). The "number of games" refers to, for example, the "number of times the special symbol lottery is executed".

After shifting to the specific gaming state 1 (low probability / high base state), both the above-mentioned "electric chew support function" and "variation time shortening function" are activated in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device in the game board P5 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the normal electric gate device P740 and the second start winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory are placed in the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. The mouth P721 is arranged, and the player can easily receive the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery by performing "right-handed" to launch the game ball into the right-hand region P501R (right-handed region) of the gaming area. Further, the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is controlled to the above-mentioned "time saving state" in the specific gaming state 1 (low probability / high base state).

To explain the progress of the game in more detail, when the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is reached, the player launches a game ball into the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and the general drawing The first procedure is to enter (pass) the ball into the actuated gate device P740, and by entering (passing) the ball into the actuated gate device P740, the main control board P40 receives a normal symbol lottery. Since the normal symbol lottery in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is won with a high probability (about 1/1) due to the operation of the normal figure probability change function, the game ball is sent to the normal figure operation gate device P740. When the ball enters (passes), the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 occurs once. When the ordinary electric accessory P770 is activated, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is premised on, has the second start winning opening P721, which triggers the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol, in an easy-to-enter state, and the player continues to play the second. As a procedure, a game ball is launched toward the second starting winning opening P721. When a game ball enters the second start winning opening P721, detection information is input to the main control board P40, a special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the right to execute the special game (big hit, small hit). The lottery related to the acquisition of is executed.

The specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In the case of acquisition of a small hit game, it is often assumed that the specific game state does not end, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, acquisition of a small hit game (or acquisition of multiple small hit games, a specific type) It may be designed to end by (acquisition of a small hit game). When the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) ends depending on the number of games, the process shifts to the normal game state (low probability / low base state).

[Specific game state 2: High probability / High base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in (3), (7), and (9) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state. Although not shown, there may be a case where the specific game state 2 shifts to the specific game state 2 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (4), (8), and (10) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (4), (8), and (10) include (a) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 2. (c). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed.

After shifting to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state), in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" was further activated for the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state). The difference is that it is a "high probability (state)". The progress of the game and the method of the game in the specific game state 2 are the same as those in the specific game state 1, and the difference is that the player can win the big hit earlier than the high probability of winning the big hit in the special symbol lottery. do.

The specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In general, the specific game state 2 does not end in the case of acquiring a small hit game. When the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) ends depending on the number of games, the normal game state (low probability / low base state), the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state), and the specific game state Move to 3 (high probability / low base state).

[Specific game state 3: High probability / low base state]
Subsequently, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific gaming state 3 (high probability / low base state) is performed by the gaming state transition shown in FIGS. 6 (5), (10), and (11). The game state transition conditions of (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state, and (b) to elapse the predetermined number of games (* (10). ) Only) and so on. Although not shown, there may be a case where the specific game state 3 shifts to the specific game state 3 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (6), (9), and (12) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (6), (9), and (12) include (c) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 3. (d). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed (* (6) only).

When shifting to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated and becomes a "high probability (state)", and the specific game state 1 and the specific game Unlike the state 2, the "electric chew support function" and the "variation time shortening function" are not operating. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device in the game board P5 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the normal electric gate device P740 and the second start winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory are placed in the right side area P501 (right-handed area) of the game area. Although the mouth P721 is arranged, it is assumed that the player performs a "right-handed" to launch a game ball into the right-hand area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). However, the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is low, and there is no advantage in hitting right.

Therefore, the player advances the game by "left-handed" in which the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area, and since it is in a high probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit in the special symbol lottery is high. Except for the fact that the jackpot game can be acquired at an early stage because it is high, the game method and game progress are the same as in the normal game state (low probability / low base state).

The specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In general, the specific game state 3 does not end in the case of acquiring a small hit game. When the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) ends depending on the number of games, the process shifts to the normal game state (low probability / low base state).

The specific gaming state 3 (high probability / low base state) is different from the board layout configuration of FIG. 6 described as the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, and the normal electric accessory P770 is located in the right side region P501R (right-handed region). Arrangement of winning devices on the game board, such as arranging a third start winning opening of a type that does not have, and activating the "time saving state" so that many special symbol lottery can be received in a short time. In addition, depending on the control of the time saving state, "right-handed" may be the recommended gaming state.

As described above, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the game progresses according to a plurality of gaming states, but it is not always necessary to provide all the above-mentioned gaming states. Therefore, among the game machine specifications composed of a combination of a plurality of gaming states, the game machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted by the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P are illustrated below.

Regarding typical gaming machine specifications ("specs"), as an example of the types of gaming machine specifications related to the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery, "(until next time) probability change", "ST (number of times cut probability change)" , "V probability change (also called" ball probability "," attack round system ")", "latent probability change" can be adopted. The difference in the specifications of the gaming machine due to the difference in the probability fluctuation function may be expressed as "this gaming machine is a" XX machine (example: ST machine) "". Further, in a gaming machine having no probability fluctuation function, by passing through a specific area P760 inside the large winning opening P751 during a small hit game, the accessory continuous operation device is subsequently activated (that is, the game shifts to the large hit game). There is also a game machine specification called "small hit V".

[Probability change (until next time)]
First, I will explain "probability change (until next time)". "Probability change until next time" is generally defined as "specific game state 2 (specific game state 2), which is the most advantageous game state among the above-mentioned specific game states among a plurality of specific game states provided in the pachinko gaming machine P. The game machine specifications for the "pachinko game machine" that will continue until the right of the next big hit game is acquired (high probability / high base state) are shown. In other words, the "probability change until next time" gaming machine is configured so that the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) continues until the right to the next big hit game is acquired, and it does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations. Has been done.

Depending on the type of big hit, there may be a case where the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is controlled. Also, in the "pachinko gaming machine that continues until the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) acquires the right to the next big hit game", the probability fluctuation function continues until the next big hit. Although it is sometimes called "probability change until the next time", the base state is "low base state", and the same game as the normal game state (low probability / low base state) may be required for the electric chew support function. In this way, since it is a probabilistic change until the next time when the electric chew support function is not operating, it is expressed separately as "latent probability change".

[ST (Probability change)]
Next, "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" will be described. "ST" is an abbreviation for "Special Time", and generally, "specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) performs a predetermined number of special symbol lottery (predetermined number of times). The game machine specifications for "Pachinko game machines that will continue until the right of the jackpot game is acquired" are shown.

Depending on the type of big hit, there may be a case where the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is controlled. In addition, as in the case of the above-mentioned "probability change until the next time", the game state is set to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) until a predetermined number of special symbol lottery is performed or the right of the big hit game is acquired. It is also possible to configure the case to be controlled so as to have a state called "latent probability change (latent ST)".

In addition, even in the case of "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)", the period in which the gaming state is controlled by ST is set to "until the lottery of the special symbol lottery is performed 10,000 times". If it is a gaming machine specification that can be said to guarantee a big hit until the next time, it may be expressed as "probability change until the next time".

As mentioned above, "probability change until next time" and "ST (probability change by number of times)" distinguish "probability change state" as a gaming machine specification in that the end of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is different. Is. On the other hand, regarding whether or not the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is activated in the specific game state, that is, the execution start of the probability fluctuation function, as described in the "V probability change (" ball probability "" attack round system ")" described below. Gaming machine specifications (“specs”) may be expressed by requiring special conditions.

[V probability change]
Next, a gaming machine specification called "V probability variation" will be described. The "V probability change" is referred to as a "specific area P750"("Vzone","Varea", etc.) provided in the big winning opening P751 during a big hit game before the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state. However, when the passage of a gaming ball (“V winning”) is detected under predetermined conditions (such as during the execution of a specific jackpot round), the probability fluctuation function is activated after the jackpot game. The gaming machine specifications of the pachinko gaming machine that controls the transition to the specific gaming state (specific gaming state 1 or specific gaming state 3) are shown. The "specific region" used for the "V probability variation" may be particularly referred to as a "probability fluctuation function operating region".

As described above, "V probability variation" is a gaming machine specification indicating that whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated depends on the gaming result during the jackpot game (depending on whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific region P760). There is a "V probability change (V-loop)" depending on whether the activated probability fluctuation function ends with the same control as the "probability change until the next time" explained earlier or with the same control as the "ST". An expression indicating a gaming machine specification different from "" and "V-ST" is used.

In the pachinko gaming machine P that adopts "V probability variation" as the game machine specification, if the V prize is not won during the big hit game, the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the big hit game, and the normal game state or the specific game It is controlled to state 1 (low probability / high base state). In addition, it is possible to switch whether or not the game state in which the probability fluctuation function operates after the big hit game is switched between the case where the V prize is won and the case where the V prize is not won, and at the same time, the operation mode of the electric chew support function can be changed. As an example, in the "V probability variation (V-loop)" machine, if V is won, the probability fluctuation function and the electric chew support function will continue until the next big hit, and if V is not won, the probability fluctuation function will be activated. The electric chew support function is also limited to 100 special symbol lottery.

[Small hit V]
Next, a gaming machine specification (spec) called "small hit V" will be described as a gaming machine specification that can provide a gaming state advantageous to the player regarding the acquisition of a big hit without having a probability fluctuation function.

The "small hit V" is a "specific area" provided inside the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game (during the operation of the special electric accessory) executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit. When passing through "P760" (sometimes referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.), a gaming machine specification that activates a continuous accessory actuating device following a small hit game, that is, starts a big hit game. be. In other words, by passing the specific area P760 during the small hit, it is a gaming machine specification that can acquire the big hit game without obtaining the result of the big hit as a result of the special symbol lottery.

"Small hit V" is a special electric accessory that is not operating as a result of the special symbol lottery. It is a specification that operates the accessory continuous operation device when it passes through the specific area P760 during operation (while the large winning opening P751 is open), and while it may be expressed as "Type 1 small hit V", the conventional pachinko game Since it has a game playability close to that of the so-called "type 2 pachinko" gaming machine, it may be expressed as "type 1 and type 2 mixer".

Generally, a pachinko gaming machine that adopts "small hit V" as a gaming machine specification does not have a probability change function (probability fluctuation function), and the degree of advantage is changed depending on the presence or absence of an electric chew support function. That is, it becomes a change trigger of a special symbol (for example, winning a small hit at 1/2) that makes it easy to win a prize opening related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, which makes it easy to win when the electric chew support function is activated. By configuring it with a starting winning opening, it is easy to win a small hit when the electric chew support function is operating, and it is possible to aim for a big hit with a V winning during a small hit game. By doing so, instead of increasing the random value range that becomes a big hit as in the probability variation function, it is a game playability that increases the possibility of acquiring a big hit by a small hit.

[Other game machine specifications (specs)]
The game machine specifications described above are typical, and some other characteristic game machine specifications are known. Therefore, they will be briefly described below.

(limiter)
The "limiter" is a case where a specific game state in which the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function is activated is repeatedly performed with the execution of the jackpot game in between (so-called "ream villa" state), and is determined in advance. When the number of repetitions (number of consecutive villas) is reached, even if the jackpot game that the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function is supposed to operate is executed, the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function It is a function that limits the operation. As a limiter function, the function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "probability change limiter", and the function that limits the "electric chew support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "time saving limiter (electric sapoli limiter)". Call. A gaming machine having a limiter function is called a "limiter machine".

(Fall)
The "fall" is a gaming machine that executes a "fall lottery" that determines whether or not to terminate the probability fluctuation function each time a special symbol lottery is performed during the period when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is operating. Show the specifications. In the situation where the electric chew support function is operating together with the probability fluctuation function, if the fall lottery is won, the operation of the electric chew support function ends at the end of the probability fluctuation function, or only the probability fluctuation function ends. The operation of the electric chew support function may continue.

It should be noted that a plurality of the above-mentioned gaming machine specifications can be combined. For example, when "ST" and "falling" are combined, the specific gaming state 2 (high probability / high base state) is set to ( If either 1) the fall lottery is won, (2) the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times, or (3) the right to the jackpot game is acquired, the specific game state 2 (high) is satisfied. Probability / high base state) will end (shift to another gaming state).

Next, the control of the main control board P40 that controls the progress of the game in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise to be described in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine that adopts "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" as the above-mentioned gaming machine specifications (specs) will be described. .. In the description of the embodiment, the notation of "P-s OO" indicating the processing step in the figure will be described as "step OO" in the text.

[Power-on processing of main control board (main loop processing of main control board)]
The main control board P40 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, first executes the power-on processing (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned on. Here, the details of the power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

When the power-on process is started on the main control board P40 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, initial settings related to the operation of the CPU, which is an arithmetic unit provided on the main control board P40, are performed (step 1002). The initial setting is to appropriately set the setting necessary for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initial setting is completed, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power cutoff information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006) are subsequently executed, and the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is received in response to these processes. ) Is performed.

More specifically, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is a "set value" for changing the degree of advantage of the special symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine P (particularly, the operation probability of the accessory continuous operation device, that is, the jackpot probability). Regarding the flag of whether or not it is in the state of performing "setting change processing" that can change "", and the flag of whether or not it is in the state of performing "setting confirmation processing" for confirming the "setting value", It is a process of generating information for determining whether or not to establish (whether or not to turn on) in the game stop state setting process performed later. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the detection status of the frame opening switch P131 (a switch that detects that the front frame is open to the outer frame) and the detection status of whether the ram clear switch P48 is operated by the player. , Data including data indicating the detection status of whether the setting key switch P49 is rotated is generated as 1-byte data.

In the subsequent power off information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006), when the power was turned off last time, the pachinko gaming machine P normally turned off the power, and the control data related to the game state when the power cut occurred was normally performed. It is a process of confirming whether the data is normally saved and stored in the storage area of the CPU of the main control board P40. If the data is not normal, the game is played in the game stop state setting process (step 1008) described later as an error. It is a process to set (turn on) a flag to stop.

In the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), after the process in the power-on process is completed and the process shifts to the main loop process to start the game, a flag is set to prevent the player from actually playing the game. Based on the processing results of the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power off information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006), the "setting change state", "setting confirmation state", and "unrecoverable". It is a process to set a flag to shift to one of the "error state" and the game progress disallowed state. The details of the "game stop state setting process" are shown in FIG. 8, and the description will be given based on the description in FIG.

In the game stop state setting process, it is first determined whether or not the frame is open based on the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko gaming machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), the specific bit of the 1-byte data is "1". Therefore, the processing of the following step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the frame is not open when the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, it is assumed that some of the essential operations for executing the setting change process are not satisfied, and the input port confirmation process (step 1004) generated 1 Calculates the operation information of the setting key switch from the byte data so that it becomes off data. Although not shown, in any case of YES or NO in step 1102, the bit in the 1-byte data whose frame is open is also calculated to be off data.

In the following step 1104, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that can be determined as "there is a setting change operation". In the premise pachinko gaming machine P, the situation where it is judged that "there is a setting change operation" is (1) the frame release switch P131 is on (the frame is open when the power is turned on), and (2) the setting key switch P49 is on. It requires three states: (it is being rotated) and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. As described above, the information of the frame opening switch P131 is set to off in the 1-byte data, and it is determined in this step whether or not both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, when the two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that there is a setting change operation (note that the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1", and either of them is used. One data may be "0"). Then, when it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, that is, when it is determined to be YES in step 1104, the data indicating "setting is being changed" is stored as the game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process is terminated (. Step 1106, step 1118). On the other hand, if NO is determined in step 1104, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1108. If the set value information stored in the ram (RAM = Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (when the operation is to return from the unrecoverable error state), it is set as the initial setting value. The data corresponding to the set value "1" is set in the area for storing the set value (step 1118).

Next, in step 1108, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred. The game stop error is an error that requires ram clearing and setting (changing) processing when the game cannot proceed, such as a checksum abnormality (ram abnormality) or a setting value abnormality. Refers to. The determination in step 1108 determines whether or not the game should be set as the game stop state based on the processing result of the power off information confirmation / checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored at the time of the previous power off processing. .. If it is determined that an error state should be set (if YES is determined in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting process is terminated (step 1110, step 1118). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1112.

In the following step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 is operated. In the game stop state setting process, as a state when proceeding to the relevant step
(A) When the operation to shift to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, among the judgments that "there is a setting change operation", (1) the frame opening switch P131 is on (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on). , (2) When the setting key switch P49 is on, is satisfied, and (3) The ram clear switch P48 is on, is not satisfied.
(B) When the ram clear operation for clearing the data is performed, in other words, (2) the setting key switch P49 is on, is not satisfied, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. When satisfied
(C) When the power is turned on without any operation such as "setting change operation", "setting confirmation operation", "ram clear operation", etc.
It is one of the situations. The 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) in these states is (a) the bit data indicating on / off of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (on data)", and (b) the ram clear switch. The bit data indicating on / off of the operation detection state of P48 is "1 (on data)", and (c) the 1-byte data is all off data (for example, all bits "0").

Then, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated in step 1112, and if there is a ram clear operation (when it is determined to be YES in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine goes into a game-enabled state after ram clearing. In order to make the transition, a process of clearing the game stop state flag is performed (step 1114). On the other hand, except in the situation where the ram clear operation is performed, the current 1-byte data is set as it is, and at this time, when the operation to shift the game stop state flag to the "setting confirmation state" is performed (in step 1112). (When determining NO), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and the 1-byte data indicating the game stop status flag is stored as data indicating "setting is being confirmed" (when it is determined to be NO). Step 1118). Further, when there is neither a ram clear operation nor a transition operation to the setting confirmation state, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is originally data indicating that there is no game stop as a game stop state flag. It is set as information without game stop.

If a value indicating some kind of stop state is stored for the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), it is the main game allowable state in the power-on process (step 1000). In the interrupt processing (step 2000), which is the main body of the game progress control executed after the transition to the loop (step 1028 to step 1036), the value indicating the stopped state is referred to, and the game progress described as "basic game progress". However, these controls will be described later in the description of interrupt processing.

Returning to the description of the power-on process of FIG. 7, the subsequent process will be described. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is completed, it is determined whether or not the ram clear operation has been performed (step 1010). The ram clear operation is that the ram clear switch P48 is operated when the power of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned on. This process is executed regardless of whether the setting key switch P49 is off or on. If it is determined in step 1010 that there is a ram clear operation, a predetermined storage area is initialized from the ram storage area of the main control board P40.

In the subsequent processes from step 1014 to step 1020, a process of setting an effect control command (effect command) for causing the effect control board P41 to recognize the state of the gaming machine is performed from the main control board P40 when the power is turned on. More specifically, in step 1014, a process of clearing the effect control command that had not been transmitted when the power was cut off last time (when the power was cut off) is performed from the storage area. Then, when the information regarding the current gaming state of the main control board P40 restored after the power is turned on in step 1016 is generated as an effect control command and it is determined in step 1018 that the gaming state is not stopped, the generated restoration is performed in step 1020. The effect control command indicating the game state is set in the area for storing the transmission data of the effect control command.

When the processing related to the setting of the effect control command at the time of turning on the power is completed, the necessary data (drive signal) for returning the large winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) and the ordinary electric accessory P770 to the state before the power failure occurred. ) Is output from the output port to the special electric accessory driving means P70 and the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71. (Step 1022)

Then, when the processing up to step 1022 in the power-on processing is completed, the CPU of the main control board P40 is subjected to the processing of setting the generation interval of the interrupt processing time (step 1024). In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the interval for executing the interrupt processing (FIG. 9, step 2000) described later is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process is completed, the player shifts to a cycle process called a main loop in which the player can play, and the execution of the cycle process in the main loop is repeated until a power failure occurs.

(Main loop)
As shown in FIG. 7, in the processing of the main loop of the main control board, first, the processing for prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing is performed in step 1026, and until the processing of the main loop is completed (interruption is permitted in step 1036). Up to) Limit the execution of interrupt processing.

When interrupts are disabled, in the following step 1028, to monitor the occurrence of a runaway CPU of the main control board P40 called a watchdog timer (a situation in which processing loops and the process does not proceed). Clear (initialize) the area that stores the timekeeping information.

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether the power supply is cut off (for example, whether the power supply cutoff signal sent from the power supply board P44 when the voltage drops is input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40). If the power is cut off, the current gaming state is stored, the power cut information and the check sum information are stored, and the processing of the main control board P40 as the CPU is stopped (step 1032). ) Is executed. If the power is not cut off, the process shifts to the next process.

In step 1034, a process of updating the random number used for the special symbol lottery and the random number value used for the normal symbol lottery is performed. Some of these random number values are updated in the interrupt process described later, and this is a process for preventing the random number update cycle from becoming constant due to the random number being updated only in the interrupt process. If there is a process that is executed irregularly in the interrupt process, it is possible to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant by adopting a method such as updating the random number value according to the process. Therefore, it is not essential to provide random number update processing in the main loop.

Step 1036 is the final process in the main loop, and performs a process for permitting interrupts. Immediately after that, the process returns to the interrupt disable of step 1026, which is the first process in the main loop. However, when the process of step 1036 for enabling interrupt is performed, the interrupt execution cycle (4 ms has elapsed since the previous interrupt process occurred). If the CPU of the main control board P40 has an input indicating the above state), the interrupt processing described later will be executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Subsequently, the interrupt processing (also referred to as “timer interrupt processing”) performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIG. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, most of the progress of the game is controlled by interrupt processing (step 2000), and the submodule program provided so as to be changeable according to the gaming machine specifications (specs) is generally constant. It is configured to read and control in the order of. The processing related to those submodules will be briefly described below.

(Watchdog timer clear)
At the beginning of the interrupt process, a watchdog timer clear process is provided. This process is the same process as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 7, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 described above. (Step 2002)

(Input port confirmation process)
In the input port confirmation process, by confirming the information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40, information that enables identification as to whether or not there is input information as information necessary for determination in the subsequent process is obtained. It is a process to generate. (Step 2004)

The information input to the input port includes input signals related to artificial operations such as an input signal indicating the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 and the setting key switch P49, and an input signal indicating the operation status (whether or not there is a touch) of the handle P204. , Special figure 1 Input signal indicating the game result by detecting the game ball such as the start port switch P712 and the big prize opening switch P752, the magnetic sensor P73, the door opening sensor P131, the vibration detection sensor P72, etc. are provided for fraud monitoring. There is an input signal that indicates the detection status of the sensor.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times in 10 μs (microseconds), and the data that becomes the same data (same bit) in all reads is called the input data (“level data”) in this interrupt. ), Stored in the ram of the main control board P40. For the part of the data read three times that is not the same data in all readings, the data confirmed in the previous interrupt processing (interrupt processing 4 ms before) will be adopted as level data, that is, the interrupt this time. If the data cannot be read normally in, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

Then, when the input data (level data) in the interrupt this time is confirmed, a comparison operation with the input data in the previous interrupt is performed to generate "rising data" (data that identifies the bit whose input data has changed from off to on). The data that identifies the switch that was switched to the on input by the interrupt this time is stored.

(Random number update process)
Random number update processing is performed by software among various random numbers such as win / fail random numbers, symbol random numbers, variable pattern random numbers related to special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery normal symbol random numbers, normal symbol random numbers, and normal symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers. This is a process for updating a so-called soft random number, which is a random number value to be updated (step 2006). In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the random numbers used for the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are those that are updated in the update cycle on the circuit by the random number generation circuit and those that are updated in the soft cycle. By combining them, it is configured to maintain the randomness of various random numbers at the time of random number acquisition.

In the random number update process, as described above, the soft random number is updated, but as an update method,
(A) A random number that is updated by incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1) and setting the lower limit (or upper limit) when the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range is exceeded.
(B) An arbitrary prime number is subtracted (or added) to a random number, and when the random number range is exceeded, the value of the random number range +1 (or random number range -1) is added (or subtracted).
(C) Repeat incrementing (or decrement) from the random number set as the initial value, and when the update of one cycle is completed, set the separately updated "initial value random number" as a new initial value and perform the same update. Repeat (also called initial value update type random number),
Various update methods such as can be exemplified. It should be noted that the update method is not limited to the one exemplified above, and any method may be adopted as long as the randomness of the random numbers can be maintained.

(Setting control processing)
The setting control process is performed when the game stop flag set in the power-on process (see FIG. 7) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting is being changed" or "setting is being confirmed". (Step 2008)

In the setting control process, it is determined whether or not the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated for the data stored as the game stop flag during the power-on process is on-data, and it is not on-data, that is, the pachinko gaming machine. If the setting key is not turned on when the power is turned on, this process is exited.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated during the game stop flag is on-data, the current interrupt is used to determine whether to terminate "setting changing" and "setting checking". After referring to the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the process (generated by the input port confirmation process described above), clearing the game stop flag when the setting key switch P49 is turned off, and making the game playable. An effect control command for returning (or starting) an effect is set on the effect control board according to whether the return is from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state".

Further, in the power-on process (see FIG. 7), when the game stop flag is "setting is being changed", the role of the "setting change switch" in this interrupt timing is played during the period until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. Check the operating status of the ram clear switch P48 (switch operated to change the set value). When the game stop flag is "setting is being changed", when the rising data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated in this interrupt, the "setting value" is set to the next in the predetermined change order. Change the data so that it becomes the set value. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine P having setting value data such that the setting is switched from 1 to 6 in order, each time there is rising data based on the operation of the setting change switch (ram clear switch P48), the setting is set in this setting control process. The process of increasing the value by "1" (when the set value before the operation is 6, is changed to 1 as the next value) is performed.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, by providing processing in the setting change state and setting confirmation state during interrupt processing (see FIG. 9), the operation of the setting key switch and the setting change switch is monitored in the interrupt processing cycle. , A program for periodic monitoring during power-on processing (see FIG. 7), which enables output of display data to the display device by LED output processing, which will be described later, and interrupt processing has not been set separately. Can be omitted. In addition, during the power-on process, it may be configured to monitor switches related to setting changes and setting confirmations, control display devices, and update setting values.

(Game stop monitoring process)
In the game stop monitoring process, whether or not the game is stopped by reading out the data of the game stop flag generated during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) executed by the CPU of the main control board when the pachinko gaming machine is turned on. It is a process to confirm whether or not. (Step 2010)

In the game stop monitoring process, if some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, the game stop flag data is not 0 and any bit is "1". If it is, it is determined that the game is stopped (a state in which the game needs to be stopped), and it is considered that the game is stopped, and a part of the processing during the interrupt processing (“timer subtraction processing (step 2014)” in FIG. (Up to the accessory control process (step 2028)) ”) is omitted.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as a state in which the game needs to be stopped, that is, a state in which the player cannot play the game, "setting is being changed", "setting is being confirmed", and "unrecoverable error" is displayed. A state such as "occurring" can be exemplified.

(Timer subtraction processing)
The timer subtraction process is a process of updating the timer data used for managing the time related to the progress of the game (step 2014).

As an example of the timer data update process, management of the variable display time set when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the operating time of the special electric accessory P755 during the big hit game (opening time of the big winning opening P751). ), Timer data update processing triggered by the progress of the game, timekeeping processing for error determination such as detecting ball clogging, LED lighting pattern in the main control display device P50 such as the special symbol display devices P51 and P52. Examples thereof include a process for measuring the switching time for switching, a process for measuring the period for outputting information from the external information output terminal P77 or the like to an external device (such as a hall computer), and the like.

The timer data updated by the timer update process is divided into the storage area (ram storage area) of the main control board P40 for each type of timer data such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer", and is continuous. Each is stored in the storage area.

In the timer update process, processing such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" is performed on the storage area that stores the individual types of timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. I do. The timer update process performs a process of decrementing (-1) the timer data stored in the storage area. If the stored timer data is already "0", it is processed so that it becomes "0" even after processing (if it becomes a negative value, it is set to "0", or it is set to "0". If it is "0", do not decrement, etc.).

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the cycle of one interrupt is 4 ms, so if the data is a 1-byte timer, only the management target that ends in a maximum of 255 updates (about 1 second) is controlled. It is possible, but if there is no game information managed only within 1 second (when there is little), it is also possible to configure it with only 2-byte timer data and not to have 1-byte timer update processing. Is. Further, when it is necessary to manage the time value that cannot be managed even by the 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data that can manage a longer time than the "3-byte timer".

(Validity period setting process)
The validity period setting process is a period for controlling the winning opening (mainly the winning opening related to the large winning opening P751 or the ordinary electric accessory P770) that can be changed to the easy entry mode or the difficult entry mode. It is a process of setting a valid period in the valid extension period and setting an invalid period for other periods (when the winning opening is in a difficult-to-enter mode and other than the valid extension period). (Step 2016)

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine, the winning of the big winning opening P751 as the big winning device and the winning of the second starting winning opening P721 which is the second starting winning device P720 equipped with the ordinary electric accessory P770 are set as the valid period. It becomes a process to do.

In addition, during the valid extension period, in order to treat the game ball that entered at the timing immediately before the large winning opening P751 or the ordinary electric accessory P770 shifts to the difficult entry mode, the large winning opening P750 (special electric accessory P750) is treated as an effective winning. Since it is treated as an effective period even after the control period for executing the opening control for the electric accessory such as P755) and the ordinary electric accessory P770 has elapsed, a certain period of time appropriately set according to the structure of the electric accessory is set. It is a control period.

Further, depending on the game machine specifications, when the specific area P760 (V area) is provided, an effective extension period for the passage of the game ball with respect to the specific area P760 may be set, and in such a case, in this process. The validity period of a specific area is also set.

(Prize winning monitoring process)
The winning monitoring process determines whether or not the winning is valid based on the winning of the game ball for various winning openings (large winning opening P751, starting opening P711, P721, general winning opening P731) in the pachinko gaming machine, and the prize is awarded. It is a process of generating information that triggers a process of generating a special symbol lottery right (occurrence of hold) for a ball or a starting ball. (Step 2018)

The processing contents are as follows: (a) Detection of the presence or absence of winning for each winning opening in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004) (b) The winning opening having a valid period. In that case, it is judged whether or not the prize is won during the valid period, and when a valid prize is generated for each winning opening, (c) The production control command indicating the winning information for each winning opening transmitted to the effect control board P41. Settings, (d) Update the counter value (called "winning counter") for storing the number of occurrences of operation triggers based on winning for each winning opening (in other words, among the actions based on the detection of various winning openings Updates the counter value that stores the number of unprocessed operations in).

In the winning monitoring process, not only the winning of various winning openings, but also the out-ball detection switch P792 provided for counting the out-balls, the operating opening switch P742 that triggers the ordinary symbol lottery, and the gaming machine. Depending on the specifications, it is also determined whether the game ball enters or passes through the specific area P760 (V area), and the operation of the game machine (for example, the operation of the game machine other than the generation of a prize ball or the trigger of a special symbol lottery). In this process, the presence or absence of detection of the game ball required for the process of transmitting information to the effect that the operation port switch P742 and the specific area P760 have passed to the effect control board P41 is performed.

(Operating port monitoring process)
The operation port monitoring process is a process related to the occurrence of hold related to the normal symbol lottery when the rising data of the normal figure operation port switch P742 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). conduct. (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal symbol operation port switch P742 is detected, the number of holds related to the normal symbol lottery is confirmed, and if the number of holds does not reach the upper limit, a random number is stored as a new hold. Since it is possible, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the number of holds to increase the number of holds information by one, random numbers for the normal figure hit / miss random number, the normal figure symbol random number, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern random number are used. Obtained from the generation circuit, or the current corresponding soft random number is obtained and stored as a hold.

(Ordinary symbol control processing)
The normal symbol control process performs a process related to the normal symbol lottery, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 (step 2022). These processes shift to different submodule processes depending on which is the data indicating the control state of the normal symbol called the normal symbol status or the normal electric accessory, and perform control according to the state. The status of the normal symbol is "0: Standing by normal symbol", "1: Normal symbol is changing", "2: Normal symbol is stopped and displayed", "3: Normal electric accessory is operating", "4: Normal". There is a "Demonstration of the end of the electric accessory", and processing is performed according to each state.

<< Normal symbol change start monitoring control processing >>
The normal symbol change start monitoring control process is a submodule process called by the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: waiting for the normal symbol".

In the normal symbol change start monitoring control process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the number of pending numbers related to the normal symbol lottery is "0". If it is "0", the right to change the normal symbol has not occurred, and the normal symbol control process is exited. On the other hand, if the number of holdings related to the normal symbol lottery is not "0", it means that the right to change the normal symbol has been generated, and it is judged that the condition for starting the change of the normal symbol is satisfied, and the change of the normal symbol is changed. Execute the process related to the start.

When it is determined that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the hold number information is decremented by -1 from the area for storing the hold number information related to the normal symbol lottery, and then the normal symbol hit / miss random number, the normal symbol symbol random number, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number are obtained. Call and perform a normal figure winning / failing lottery, a normal figure pattern lottery, and a normal figure fluctuation pattern lottery, store the lottery results in the storage area of the main control board, clear the random number information used this time, and store the storage area of the pending number information. The process of shifting is performed so that the processes are processed in the memorized order, and the normal symbol status is updated to "1: Normal symbol is changing". Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used depending on the operating status of the above-mentioned "base state" (probability fluctuation function of normal symbol, fluctuation time shortening function of normal symbol), and it is easy to win in the high base state. , Ordinary symbols tend to have a short variation display time.

《Processing during normal symbol change》
The normal symbol changing process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "1: normal symbol changing".

In the normal symbol change processing, a timer that manages the change display of the normal symbol until the change display time of the normal symbol according to the change pattern of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol change start monitoring control process elapses (normal). This is a process of causing the normal symbol display device P53 to execute the fluctuation display of the normal symbol until the symbol variation display timer) becomes 0 in the timer update process.

More specifically, when the normal symbol variation display timer is not 0, the normal map display switching counter whose maximum value is "5" is updated every time this process is executed, and the normal symbol display switching counter is set to "5". At the timing of "5", a process of storing information about the next light emission pattern is performed in a storage area for storing data for designating the light emission pattern of the LED constituting the normal symbol display device P53. The normal map display switching counter is reset to the initial value "0" at the timing when the maximum value is "5". That is, in the variation display of the normal symbol, the lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 is switched at intervals of 5 interrupts (4 ms × 5 = 20 ms). The switching interval can be set as appropriate. For example, if the maximum value of the normal figure display switching counter is 25, the display pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 is switched at intervals of once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms). Be done.

When the variation display time of the normal symbol ends, that is, when the normal symbol variation display timer is "0", in this process, the display pattern of the normal symbol stop display symbol determined by the normal symbol lottery is the main control display device. The data for designating the LED lighting pattern indicating the stop display mode is stored in the storage area for storing the LED lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 so that the stop display is displayed on the normal symbol display device P53 in P50. Then, the symbol fixing time (time for displaying the stop display symbol) of the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol stop display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: Normal symbol stop display".

<< Processing during normal symbol stop display >>
The normal symbol stop display processing is a submodule process called by the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "2: Normal symbol stop display".

In the normal symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the normal symbol stop display timer for which the symbol fixed time is set at the end of the normal symbol change processing is "0", and at the timing when it becomes "0". Then, a process of setting for moving to the next game operation is performed.

When the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0" and the result of this normal symbol lottery is "hit", it depends on the winning symbol and the operating state of the base state (extension function of the normal electric accessory). , Call the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770, set the operation pattern, clear the winning counter related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, and set the normal symbol status to "3: Ordinary electric accessory in operation". Update to.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0" and the result of this normal symbol lottery is "missing", the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: waiting for normal symbol". I do.

《Processing during normal electric accessory operation》
The normal electric accessory operating process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "3: Normal electric accessory is operating".

In the processing during operation of the normal electric accessory, the opening operation (change to the easy-to-enter mode) and closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory are performed based on the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 set in the processing during the normal symbol stop display. While controlling (change to a difficult-to-enter mode), the establishment of the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory is monitored. The operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 ends when (a) the specified number of ordinary electric accessory prizes set as the end condition of the ordinary electric accessory occurs, and (b) the operation of the preset operation pattern ends. This is the case (when the opening operation period of the normal electric accessory has expired).

When the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory is satisfied, the extension period of a fixed time determined in advance corresponding to the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is measured in the timer area for storing the effective extension period of the ordinary electric accessory. Set the time. Then, the time value related to the operation end demonstration of the ordinary electric accessory is set in the ordinary electric accessory operation end demo timer, and the ordinary symbol status is set to "4: During the ordinary electric accessory end demonstration".

<< Demonstration processing to end normal electric accessory operation >>
The normal electric accessory operation end demo process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "4: Ordinary electric accessory end demo".

In the normal electric accessory operation end demo process, the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer set in the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer waits until it becomes "0", and the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer becomes "0". When it becomes, the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: waiting for normal symbol" is performed.

(Starting port monitoring process)
In the start port monitoring process, when the start-up data of the special figure 1 start port switch P712 and the special figure 2 start port switch P722 are generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), the special symbol lottery is performed. Performs the processing related to the occurrence of the hold related to. (Step 2024)

More specifically, when the special figure 1 start port switch P712 and the special figure 2 start port switch P722 are detected, the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery is confirmed, and the number of holds does not reach the upper limit. Can store a random number as a new hold, so after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area storing the hold number and increasing the hold number information by one, the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern The random number is acquired from the random number generation circuit, or the current corresponding soft random number is acquired and stored as a hold.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, there are two types of special symbols, the first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 1) and the second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 2). Since the symbols are provided, the data of the holding number and the starting opening switch of the corresponding special symbols are called for each of the starting openings provided on the gaming board P5, the holding numbers are added to each starting opening, and random numbers are acquired. Is processed.

Further, when the starting port to be processed is composed of the starting port (electric chew) related to the ordinary electric accessory, the starting port winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 is valid in the above-mentioned validity period setting process. After determining whether or not it was performed within the period, if it is a valid period, the above-mentioned processing is performed.

When storing the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, the acquired random number information is used in advance using the advance notice judgment value table, and the fluctuation content when the fluctuation based on the various reserved random numbers is executed is performed in advance. Information that can be inferred is generated and notified to the effect control board P41 as an effect control command (referred to as "preliminary determination command", "preliminary determination information", and "look-ahead determination command"). The pre-judgment command is generated for each of the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, and when transmitted to the effect control board P41, it is used for the lottery related to the execution of the "look-ahead effect" described later on the effect control board P41. Will be done.

(Special symbol control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) includes status information for managing a special symbol called special symbol status (also referred to as "special symbol status") and special electric accessory status (also referred to as "special electric game status"). Depending on the state information for managing the operating state of the special electric accessory called, any of the special symbol change start management (special symbol change start monitoring control process), special symbol change process, and special symbol stop symbol display process. Execute the process.

The special symbol status includes "0: waiting for special symbol change", "1: special symbol change", "2: out-of-order symbol stop display", "3: big hit symbol stop display", "4: small hit". It has a state of "design stop display", and the status of the special electric accessory includes "0: waiting for a hit", "1: the special electric accessory is operating", "2: the big winning opening is closed", and "3". : Big hit end demonstration "," 4: Small hit special electric operation "," 5: Small hit closed "," 6: Small hit end demonstration ". Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, it may not have a small hit, and in that case, it does not have the status data related to the small hit. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

When there are a plurality of special symbols, the special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority). In a predetermined order, the process of preferentially controlling the second special symbol is performed, and in a situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held, the change of the second special symbol comes first. The pachinko gaming machine P, which is called "second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" and is premised on the game machine specifications that are processed to be started (the second special symbol changes preferentially), is implemented. In the description of the embodiment, the processing related to this type will be described as an example.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When the control of the second special symbol is started, the information of the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the information of the special electric accessory status is first referred to. In the case of data indicating that the special electric bonus status is during a big hit game or a small hit game (when the special electric bonus status is other than "0: waiting for a hit"), the first special symbol is changing. If the special symbol status of the special symbol is other than "0: Waiting for special symbol change", the process is completed without performing the process.

When the control of the second special symbol is executed, the process of updating the timer value of the control related to the second special symbol is executed. The timer is updated by the process of decrementing (-1) the data in the storage area for storing the timer, and if the decremented result is a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the timer update is completed, the submodule process described later is called and executed based on the special symbol status corresponding to the special symbol 2. Although the timer subtraction process is also performed during the interrupt process, the timer updated by the timer subtraction process does not include the timer data updated by the special symbol control process, and the special symbol control process does not include the timer data. It manages timer data for control related to special symbols.

<< Special symbol change start monitoring control processing >>
The special symbol change start monitoring control process is a submodule process that shifts when the special symbol status is “0: waiting for special symbol change”.

In the special symbol change start monitoring control process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a hold of the special symbol being processed as a target, and if there is no hold, the process is completed, and if there is a hold, the following process is executed. Subsequent processing is a special symbol lottery performed when the fluctuation is started. In the special symbol lottery, first, the data stored as the set value is read out and inspected, and it is determined whether or not the set value information is appropriate. If the set value is appropriate, the lottery table is appropriately selected with reference to the data in the area storing each flag indicating the game state, etc., the winning / losing lottery, the symbol lottery, and the variable pattern lottery are executed, and the lottery result is obtained. After being stored in the storage area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: Special symbol is changing". Further, the content determined by the special symbol lottery is transmitted to the effect control board P41 as an effect control command (win / fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command), and the content of the variation effect executed according to the variation display of the special symbol. It is used as information for the determination process (lottery process) of. The details of the special symbol lottery will be described later.

《Processing during special symbol change》
The special symbol changing process is a submodule process that shifts when the special symbol status is “1: special symbol changing”.

In the special symbol change processing, the timer that manages the change display time of the special symbol is monitored until the change time of the special symbol determined by the change pattern lottery elapses, and every interrupt is performed until the remaining change time becomes "0". The special symbol display device (second special symbol display device P52 (when controlling the special symbol 1)) is used to display the fluctuation display of the special symbol every 25 interrupts by the updated special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24"). Performs the lighting display pattern switching process of the first special symbol display device P51)).

When the remaining variation display time of the special symbol becomes "0", it indicates that the variation display of the special symbol has been executed once for the external device (data counter, hall computer, etc.) connected to the pachinko gaming machine P. Information setting for outputting an external signal, processing for setting a fixed symbol time for fixed display of a special symbol, and stop display indicating a stop display symbol determined as a result of a win / fail lottery or a symbol lottery. The lighting pattern data for displaying the symbol on the special symbol display device P52 (P51) is set. Then, the special symbol status is set to one of "2: out of place symbol stop display", "3: big hit symbol stop display", and "4: small hit symbol stop display" according to the result of the winning / failing lottery.

<< Processing during display of special symbol off symbol stop display >>
The process of displaying the special symbol out of place symbol stop is a process of shifting to the case where the special symbol status is "2: Out of place symbol stop display in progress".

In the process of displaying the special symbol off symbol stop, it is confirmed whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixed time set in the special symbol change process is "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes the processing target. The special symbol status of the special symbol is updated to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", and the number of remaining games in the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time shortening function) related to the special symbol lottery is updated. At the same time as updating, it is confirmed that the end condition is satisfied, and when the game state transition condition is satisfied, control (flag off, etc.) related to the transition of the game state is performed.

<< Processing during special symbol jackpot symbol stop display >>
The special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing is a process of shifting to the case where the special symbol status is “3: jackpot symbol stop display in progress”.

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixed time set in the special symbol changing processing is "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes the processing target. The special symbol status of the special symbol is updated to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", and the status of the special electric accessory is updated to "2: The big winning opening is closed". Further, in order to terminate the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time shortening function) related to the special symbol lottery, a process of clearing each remaining number of times information storage area and operation flag storage area is executed. Then, in order to execute the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol, the information of various storage areas used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized from the jackpot symbol information, and the special electric accessory P755 is controlled during the jackpot game. Set the content data.

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing, a process of transmitting an effect control command for executing the effect of the jackpot game (big hit start demo effect) to the effect control board P41 is further executed. Further, in accordance with these processes, a right-handed indicator light P56 (a right-handed game in which a game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the game area), which is one of the components of the main control display device P50, is recommended. Lighting pattern data for lighting the LED) that is sometimes lit is also set.

<< Processing during special symbol small hit symbol stop display >>
The special symbol small hit symbol stop display processing is a process of shifting to the case where the special symbol status is “4: Small hit symbol stop display in progress”.

Similar to the special symbol big hit symbol stop display processing, the special symbol small hit symbol stop display processing is performed when the symbol fixing time ends, data related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 is set, and the right-handed indicator lamp P56 is turned on. Perform the relevant setting process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this prerequisite technology, when the small hit game is executed (stop display of the small hit symbol), unlike when the big hit symbol is stopped, the game state (high probability state or high probability state) related to the special symbol lottery It does not have a process to end (high base state), and the game state is determined based on the judgment result of whether or not the end condition is satisfied for each game state, as in the process of the process of processing the special symbol off symbol stop display. Control. In addition, the status of the special electric accessory will be updated to "5: Small hit closed" according to these processes. Depending on the game machine specifications, as a modification, the specifications are designed to have a process of forcibly ending the game state (high probability state or high base state) when the small hit game is executed, as in the case of stopping the big hit symbol. It is also possible.

When any of the above sub-module processes is selectively performed, the process of the first special symbol is performed following the process of the second special symbol. Regarding the processing of the first special symbol, only the information to be referred to is different from the processing of the second special symbol (for example, regarding whether or not the fluctuation can be started, the special symbol status of the second special symbol is not the status of the special symbol of the first special symbol. The explanation is omitted because almost the same processing is only repeated in (judgment by referring to).

《Ordered entry control, parallel control》
Further, in the above-mentioned explanation of the special symbol control process, the description is based on the process related to the "second special symbol priority digestion control", but there are cases where a gaming machine specification different from that of the pachinko gaming machine, which is the premise of the present invention, is adopted. It is also possible to proceed with the special symbol control process by different processes. The typical ones will be briefly described below.

The "ball entry order digestion control" is a gaming machine specification in which the reserved information corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order of generation. While the fluctuation of one symbol is not performed, the fluctuation display of the other is not performed, and in a certain game state, both the reserved ball corresponding to the first special symbol and the reserved ball corresponding to the second special symbol are generated. It is a specification that is often adopted when it is expected.

"Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is different from the above-mentioned "second special symbol priority digestion control" and "ball entry order digestion", and at the same time, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. It is a type of gaming machine specification that can be used. Since two symbols can be digested at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol lottery per unit time. In addition, when the special electric accessory P755 operates (when a big hit or a small hit is executed) with the stop display of the special symbol of 1, the other symbol is forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped or the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Specifications that temporarily suspend the subtraction of the remaining time are adopted as appropriate. As an example, if one special symbol is a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss, or if one special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the other It is possible to adopt a specification that temporarily suspends the variable display of special symbols.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
In the special electric accessory control process, the sub-module process related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 is executed according to the data content (value) of the special electric accessory status (sometimes referred to as the special electric gaming status), and the special electric accessory control process is executed. It is a process of managing the operation of an object (step 2028). In other words, when executing a big hit game or a small hit game, it is a process of controlling each state in the big hit game and the small hit game state, and controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening P751.

As mentioned above, the status of the special electric accessory includes "0: waiting for a hit", "1: the special electric accessory is operating", "2: the big prize opening is closed", and "3: the big hit end demonstration". , "4: Small hit special electric operation is in progress", "5: Small hit is closed", and "6: Small hit end demonstration is in progress".

Of these special electric accessory statuses, if the status is "0: waiting for a hit", the player's game has not yet acquired the right to execute the big hit game or the small hit game. , The special electric accessory control process ends without any process.

When the status of the special electric accessory is other than "0: waiting for hit", one of the processes described later is executed according to the status.

<< Processing during operation of special electric accessory >>
The processing during operation of the special electric accessory is a process executed when the status of the special electric accessory is "1: the special electric accessory is operating" or "4: the small hit special electric is operating". This process is a process in which a so-called round game (unit game) is being executed in a special game (a state in which the large winning opening P751 can be controlled to open).

In the process during operation of the special electric accessory, first, a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the round game (unit game) is satisfied is performed. The conditions for ending the round game are (a) a specified number of winnings (also called "count") according to the activated special electric accessory, or (b) the operation pattern of the special electric accessory to be executed. It is determined that the opening time (opening pattern) set as is completed or the opening time is satisfied. If these conditions are not satisfied, the special electric accessory control process in the current interrupt process is terminated without performing the subsequent process. In addition, in the operation pattern (opening pattern) of the special electric accessory P755, there is a pattern for opening and closing the large winning opening P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, one round. While the timer used to determine (a) during the game is set to "0" multiple times, after confirming whether or not there is the next operation data during one round game, the condition (c) " When it is determined that there is no next operation pattern data in this unit game, it is determined that the above (a) is satisfied.

On the other hand, when either (a) or (b) of the above conditions for ending the round game is satisfied, the closing time of the large winning opening is stored in the closing time management timer of the special electric accessory as a subsequent process. , Increment the status of the special electric accessory to "2: The big prize opening is closed". Then, command data for notifying the end of the round game is set as an effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the process ends.

《Processing while closing the big prize opening》
The processing during closing of the large winning opening is a processing executed when the status of the special electric accessory is "2: closing of the large winning opening" or "5: closing of the small hit". This process is a process in which the special game is controlled in the "between rounds" between the so-called round games, and before the start of the first round at the start of the big hit game or the small hit game. When the game is controlled by the "big hit start demo (period)" or "small hit start demo (period)", or after the round game of the final round is completed, the process during the hit end demo described later is executed. This is the process related to the state where the control is performed during the waiting period until the result is reached.

In the processing during closing of the large winning opening, first, it is determined whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening set in the processing during operation of the special electric accessory has elapsed, and the closing time management timer is not "0", that is, the closing time. If has not passed, the special electric accessory control process in the interrupt this time is terminated.

If the closing time of the big winning opening has passed, was the operation (round game) of the special electric accessory P755 that was completed first the final round game in this hit game (big hit game, small hit game)? Judging whether or not, different processes are executed at the end of the final round game and at the end of the round game other than the final round (or at the time of the winning start demo). To determine whether or not it was the final round game, the cumulative data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 that was activated during this hit game is the maximum number of operations data of the special electric accessory P755 that was activated during this hit game. It is judged based on whether or not it exceeds, and the cumulative data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is "0" at the time of the hit start demonstration.

If it is determined that the final round game is over in the process of closing the big winning opening, the execution pattern of the winning end demo according to the type of hit (the type of special symbol that started the big hit or small hit). Read and set (mainly hit end demo time data). Then, the special electric accessory status is incremented to "3: Big hit end demo in progress" or "6: Small hit end demo in progress", and an effect command for executing the end demo effect is set on the effect control board P41. Demonstration. Further, in order to set the valid extension period of the large winning opening P751, the time value data determined as the valid extension period is stored in the timer that manages the valid extension period of the large winning opening P751 and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined at the end of the game other than the final round game (or at the time of the winning start demo) in the process of closing the large winning opening, the next round game is the number of rounds as the effect control command for the effect control board P41. Information that makes it possible to identify whether or not there is (N round start demo command * N is an integer) and the recommended firing position during the hit game (in the assumed pachinko machine, the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game board) Send information (right-handed command) to instruct.

Then, the status of the special electric accessory is decremented and updated to "1: Special electric accessory is operating" or "4: Small hit special electric is operating", and the number of winning balls to the large winning opening P751 during the round game Initialize the data in the data area for counting. Then, the time value related to the first opening (or closing immediately after the start of the round game) of the large winning opening P751 during the round game is set, and the operation pattern data of the large winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) in the round game is set. Then, the data in the storage area regarding the cumulative number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is incremented.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for giving a game ball as a prize ball to a player in response to a prize of a game ball for a prize opening arranged on the game board P5. The processing content is configured to execute the following three submodule processes. (Step 2030)

《Payout data reception monitoring process》
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process of confirming the presence / absence of a control command related to the execution of the prize ball payout transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (memorizing) the transmitted command. .. The main control board P0 stores the information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). The register 1 is called a status register and stores information for determining whether or not there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether or not the transmitted information is normally transmitted. Has been done. The other register is called a data register, and stores information on control contents related to payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43. If the status register is not abnormal, the data in the data register is stored as payout control information. Store in the area.

<< Disbursement command request processing >>
In the payout command request process, the winning counter data for each winning opening that stores the winning count data of various winning openings stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018) is confirmed, and the presence or absence of unpaid winning is confirmed. The confirmation process is confirmed in a predetermined order for each winning opening, and when it is determined that the data of the winning counter is not "0" for one winning opening, the number of winning balls of the corresponding winning opening is determined. , Performs a process of transmitting a control command for executing the payout of the game ball to the payout control board P43. By this process, even if the winning counter data for the plurality of winning openings is not "0", the payout control command transmitted to the payout control board P43 with one interrupt is limited to one.

<< Payout command control processing >>
In the payout command control process, it is checked whether or not the payout control board P43 has normally received the information regarding the number of payouts, and whether the command is normally received in this process or it is determined that a communication error has occurred due to some abnormality. It will be. Until the command reception status is confirmed in the payout command control process (whether reception is completed normally or an error is determined), the next payout control command transmission in the payout command request process is the payout command request process. And is temporarily suspended by the flag data that is set to be on / off in the payout command control process.

(Anomaly detection processing)
The abnormality detection process is a process for confirming the presence or absence of an abnormality from the information of the sensor provided for fraud detection in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. (Step 2032)

More specifically, regarding the input of sensors such as the vibration sensor P72, the magnetic sensor P73, the radio wave detection sensor P74, and the frame opening sensor P131, an abnormality occurs based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). It is a process to judge whether or not the situation is present. In addition to various sensors, harnesses for electrical connection have been removed, and short circuits on wiring are also included as detection targets.

Then, when abnormal data exists for any of the judgment information, a command for notifying the error information is set as an effect control command for the effect control board P41 after storing the error data by turning on the corresponding error flag. do.

(Sensor detection judgment processing)
In the sensor detection determination process, the period during which the sensor or switch is continuously detected is determined from the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and the process is performed. This is the process of establishing the flag. (Step 2034)

In the sensor detection judgment process, when the level data of the detection data information of the target sensor or switch is on, the data for counting the continuous on input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and various processes are executed. It is determined whether or not the start condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, the process corresponding to the switch to be monitored is executed. When the switch to be monitored is no longer on-data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, when the winning opening detection switch provided in the winning opening continuously detects that the switch is in the ON state, it is determined that a ball jam has occurred, and the error state is controlled to produce an effect. As a control command, a process of setting command information for causing an error notification to the effect control board P41, and a generation and output request of signal data for notifying an external device (hall computer or the like) of an error are performed.

The switch to be detected in this process includes a touch sensor switch provided on the handle P204 and a switch for fraud detection, in order to determine whether it is due to human operation or electrical noise. It also targets sensors that require on-data input for a certain period of time.

(Game status display processing)
The game state display process is a process of generating lighting data for displaying information regarding the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although the name is display processing, the output of the display content to the main control display device P50 is performed not by this processing but by the LED output processing described later. (Step 2036)

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as an example, an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) indicating an error state, and a special symbol hold indicator light (special figure 1 hold indicator light) indicating the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery. P61, special figure 2 hold indicator light P62), normal symbol hold indicator light P63 that displays the number of holds related to the normal symbol lottery, etc. Lighting data (lighting pattern) is generated and used as data output by LED output processing. Store.

In the game status display process, when a blinking display is required for the LED indicator lamp whose lighting is controlled, the display switching counter for the corresponding LED is updated and the lighting pattern switching process is performed by comparing the counter value and the threshold value. Will be done. For example, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the number of holdings of the special symbol lottery can be held up to four, but the special symbol holding indicator light is configured with two LED indicators (special figure 1 holding indicator light P61). , 2 LEDs are provided for each of the hold indicator lights P62), so if there are 3 or more holds, at least one LED will display a blinking display instead of a continuous lighting display. It is a specification to do.

(Output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process of setting to transmit a signal related to the game operation to the electric accessory which is an operation device on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, the payout control board P43, and the like. (Step 2038)

More specifically, when the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory or the special electric accessory is set during the normal symbol control process or the special electric accessory control process, the process during the output port output process causes the normal electric motor. Signal data for opening (or closing) each electric accessory is output to the accessory driving means P71 and the special electric accessory driving means P72 (solenoid in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine).

Further, a control signal (launch permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the launch of the game ball based on the handle operation of the player is generated and output to the payout control board P43 by the output port output process. The output content of the launch permission signal is set according to the communication status with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence status of an error requiring game stop.

(Production control command transmission process)
The effect control command transmission process is a process of outputting an effect control command to the effect control board P41, and in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the effect control command is sent to the effect control board P41 only in the effect control command transmission process. It is a specification to be transmitted (step 2040). It should be noted that the setting of the effect control command to be transmitted is set (set) in a predetermined storage area as an untransmitted effect control command during other processing.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, a storage area called a ring buffer that circularly refers to a storage destination is used as an area for storing untransmitted effect control commands. In the storage area called the ring buffer, in the next processing called "write pointer" and "read pointer", which are updated by each process of writing (set) the effect control command and reading (sending) the effect control command. The specifications are such that the writing and reading of the effect control command are executed using the information for calculating the address of the storage area for writing the command and the address of the storage area for reading the command.

Further, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the configuration of the effect control command is composed of two data, MODE data indicating the type of the command and EVENT data indicating the content of the command.

The explanation will be given by returning to the explanation of the specific processing contents of the effect control command transmission processing. In the effect control command transmission process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the above-mentioned write pointer and read pointer information match, and if they match, it is determined that there is no effect control command to be transmitted, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the data of the write pointer and the data of the read pointer do not match, it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to the next process.

When it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address of the storage area of the main control board P40 calculated from the data of the read pointer, and each is temporarily stored in the register in the CPU of the main control board P40. After storing and clearing the effect control command in the read destination ring buffer, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value used in the next processing.

As the effect control command, the MODE data and the EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 are sequentially transmitted to the effect control board P41. First, the MODE data is set in the effect command output port, which is an output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the strobe signal for causing the effect control board P41 to perform a reading operation is output. The main control board P40 subsequently outputs EVENT data, but after performing a process with a waiting time of 26 μs in order to secure a sufficient period until the effect control board P41 receives the MODE data, the MODE data. As in the case of transmission, the EVENT data is set to the output port and the strobe signal is output. When the effect control board P41 confirms the strobe signal, it generates an effect control command reception interrupt and receives the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40.

(External information output processing)
In the external information output processing, information on the game status and security-related information such as the occurrence of an error are output as signals from the external information output terminal 77 to the external device (data counter or hall computer) connected to the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. This is the process to be performed (step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is output based on the data set in the output port of the main control board P40, and when a signal output trigger occurs, a pulse signal that is on potential for a certain period is transmitted. Some of them continue to output the on-potential until the condition that the signal output ends is satisfied.

In the external information output processing, first, a signal related to the game state is generated. In order to make it possible to identify the type of specific gaming state as a signal related to the gaming state, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the operating state of the probability fluctuation function (probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (base state) are set. With reference to the corresponding information and the information indicating that the special game is in progress (big hit or small hit), if the game is controlled to each game state, the external output data is transmitted so that the corresponding data is transmitted. Update. Not limited to the ones exemplified here, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, an output signal is generated based on the information indicating the presence or absence of the fluctuation time shortening function and the information indicating that the case is a specific type of jackpot. There may be cases.

Further, as the output signal output by the external information output processing, not only the signal related to the game state but also the information based on the occurrence of the predetermined game result is output. For example, a signal (also referred to as a "fixed symbol signal") transmitted each time a special symbol variation display is executed and a stop display is displayed, or a start port switch (special figure 1 start port switch P712, special figure 2 start port switch). Every time a game ball is detected for various winning openings such as 722) and the large winning opening switch P752, or the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning balls for various winning openings reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). Every time, data is set in the external output data, and there is a signal transmitted to an external device. These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and one signal is transmitted as a pulse signal having an on-potential of 128 ms. However, when a plurality of game results are continuously generated, one signal is transmitted. After the output of the pulse signal is finished, the off-potential output for a certain period is inserted, and then the pulse signal is output again.

Further, in the external signal output processing, the data in the storage area in which the error flag as a result of the confirmation in the above-mentioned abnormality detection processing (step 2032) is stored and the comparison data for confirming whether or not an error requiring security notification has occurred. If it is determined that it is necessary to output a security signal by calculating and comparing with, the output data set in the output port is updated so that the bit corresponding to the security signal of the external output data is turned on.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to a plurality of LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light, and displaying the progress status and the game state of the game. (Step 2044)

The LEDs constituting the main control display device P50 are the first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), the second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), the first special symbol hold indicator light P61 (2 LEDs), and the second. Special symbol hold indicator light P62 (2 LEDs), normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), normal symbol hold indicator light P63 (2 LEDs), round indicator light P54, status indicator light P55, right-handed indicator light (total) It has a total of 32 LED display units (8 LEDs).

The status indicator P55 collectively represents a plurality of indicator lamps related to the game status, and in detail, a special figure probabilistic indicator lamp indicating whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated, and an operation of the normal symbol probabilistic function. It refers to an indicator light such as a normal figure probability change indicator lamp that indicates the presence / absence (whether or not the electric chew support function is activated) and an error indicator lamp that indicates an error status.

In the LED output processing, the lighting data of the display unit in the main control display device is set in the output port by one byte for each interrupt processing, and the main control display device P50 is lit, and is updated every interrupt processing. Based on the value of the digit counter, select the LED of the main control display device P50 to be lit by this interrupt, select the lighting pattern data according to the game situation, set it as display data, and control the lighting of each LED. It has become like.

That is, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the main control display device P50 is set to the main control display device P50 by a dynamic lighting method that outputs lighting data in order using at least four interrupt processes for 32 LEDs. I'm in control.

Further, in the LED output processing, in addition to the LED display that the player should visually recognize as the main control display device P50, the lighting control is performed only when the game stop flag is in the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, or the unrecoverable error state. It also controls the lighting of the LED display.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, if a flag indicating some game stop state is stored in the game stop flag, the setting of the lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted. During the setting change, setting confirmation, and unrecoverable error, all the LEDs constituting the main control display device are turned off. As a modification, when the game stop flag is set, the light emission display may be performed using a fixed lighting pattern set for each state. For example, the main control display device P50 may be displayed during the period when the setting is being changed. It may be configured to turn on all the LEDs constituting the above.

(Outside control processing)
The out-of-area control processing is related to the test signal output processing (processing for outputting the signal used for the test of the pachinko gaming machine) for outputting the signal used for the test of the pachinko gaming machine and the display of the performance display device. It is configured by a process for controlling (step 2046). The meaning of "outside the area" indicates that the process is executed by the program of the storage area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program storage area specified in the rules of the pachinko gaming machine.

In the test signal output process, processing is performed in which information related to the game result and the game state for output from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko gaming machine P to an external test device is set in the output port. In the performance display process, the game status is confirmed, the number of out balls, the ratio (base) between the number of out balls and the number of prize balls is calculated, updated as display data, and displayed on the performance display device P59. It is a process to output.

[Special design lottery]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14. The "special symbol lottery" is mainly composed of a "win / fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery".

(Win / Fail lottery)
The "win / fail lottery" is a lottery for determining whether or not the result of operating the special electric accessory P755 is based on the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed. More simply, as a lottery result of the special symbol. , "Big hit", "Small hit", or "Loss" is a lottery to decide. Depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine P, there are some that do not have a "small hit" as a lottery result of the winning / failing lottery. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have a "small hit" as a lottery result of a winning / failing lottery for one special symbol, a "small hit" is given as a lottery result of the other winning / failing lottery. It may be configured so as not to have a "hit".

The winning / failing lottery uses a random number called a "win / fail random number" among the random numbers acquired and stored when the game ball enters the starting opening (first starting winning opening P711, second starting winning opening P721, etc.). And draw lots. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the range of random numbers (random number range) that can be taken by the winning / failing random number is 65536 from "0" to "65535", and is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When a win / fail lottery is performed, the result of the win / fail lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number with the lottery table used for the win / fail lottery according to the game state and the set value (referred to as the "win / fail lottery table"). Perform processing.

FIG. 10 illustrates some lottery tables used for winning / failing lottery. FIG. 10A shows a winning / failing lottery table with a set value of “1” and a low probability state, and FIG. 10B shows a winning / failing lottery table with a set value of “1” and a high probability state. FIGS. 10 (C) and 10 (D) show the winning / failing lottery tables in the low-probability state and the high-probability state when the set value is “6”, respectively.

For example, in a situation where the winning / failing lottery is executed using the winning / failing lottery table of FIG. 10A, the winning / failing random number in the special symbol lottery this time is a random number corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is random. Assuming that the numerical value is "1500", the flow of the winning / failing lottery will be described.

First, it is determined whether or not the result of the first winning / failing lottery belongs to the big hit random value range (“0” to “327”). Specifically, the process of subtracting the random number value range "328" of the jackpot to be determined is performed from the random number value "1500" of the hit / miss random number this time. At this time, since the subtraction result is "1172" and does not become a negative value, it is determined that the hit / fail random number this time does not belong to the random number value range of the jackpot.

As a subsequent process, the random number value "1172" after the calculation of the previous jackpot determination is compared with the outlier random number value range ("328" to "65370") as the determination area of the subsequent winning / failing lottery result of the winning / failing lottery table. .. More specifically, the random number value range "65043" that is out of the judgment target is subtracted from the primary data "1172" of the hit / fail random number. At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, the information corresponding to the result of "missing" is stored as the result of the winning / failing lottery.

If a special symbol lottery is performed for the winning / failing random number "1500" this time in a high probability state, the winning / failing lottery table shown in FIG. 10 (B) will be drawn, and the random number value of the first big hit. It is determined whether or not it belongs to the range ("0" to "1639"). At this time, since the result of the comparison operation (subtraction) between the winning / failing random number and the random number value range is a negative value, the winning / failing lottery result is determined to be a “big hit”.

The presupposed pachinko gaming machine P employs a method of determining the lottery result by sequentially comparing the data acquired as the random number value with the random number value range according to the lottery result of the lottery table. The same lottery method is adopted for the winning symbol lottery and the variable pattern lottery, which will be described later. The lottery method is not limited to the above example, and a method of directly determining whether or not the value matches the big hit random value with the acquired random value may be adopted, and the lottery method differs depending on the lottery content. May be adopted.

(Winning design lottery)
In the "winning symbol lottery", in response to the winning / failing lottery result of the special symbol lottery described above, the control contents related to the subsequent operation of the special electric accessory P755 and the lottery table of the variable pattern lottery described later (see FIGS. 12 to 14). ) Is a process of determining the stop display symbol of the special symbol as a lottery result required for switching.

FIG. 11 shows a jackpot symbol lottery table (see FIG. 11 (A)) used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning / failing lottery result is “big hit”, and when the winning / failing lottery result is “small hit”. , The small hit symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery (see FIG. 11 (B)), and the losing symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning / failing lottery result is "missing" (Fig. 11 (Fig. 11 (B)). C)) is shown.

The "symbol random number" used for the winning symbol lottery is configured with the random number value range as "1000" ("0" to "999"), and when expressed by 2-byte data, the upper 1 byte is "". The data is represented by "0" to "3" and the lower 1 byte is represented by "0" to "255".

Explaining the winning symbol lottery with a specific example, for example, when the winning / failing lottery result is a big hit, the first special when the symbol random number is "400" (upper byte is "1", lower byte is "144"). In the case of a winning symbol lottery for a symbol, the lottery table of the upper 1 byte "1" shown in FIG. 11 (A) is used, and the "5R (5 rounds) probability variation 2" corresponding to the lower bytes "128" to "191" is used. Is obtained as a lottery result, and in the variable display of the special symbol, the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol display device). The stop display is displayed on P52).

Then, when the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device P51, the jackpot game corresponding to the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is executed. At this time, there are cases where "5R probability variation 2" is displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device and cases where "5R probability variation 1" is displayed as a stop display symbol. The contents of the round game (opening pattern, opening time, etc. of the big winning opening P751) may be different based on the stop display symbol, and the control contents in the specific game state to be transferred after the big hit game may be controlled to be different. It is possible. The allocation of controls in these jackpot games and specific game states is appropriately determined in order to realize playability according to the specifications (specs) of each pachinko gaming machine P, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, it is described that the symbols summarized for each type of jackpot are displayed by the lottery shown in FIG. 11 (A). For example, in the previous example, the lottery result " After determining the type of jackpot called "5R probability variation 2", the type of jackpot is determined so that the stop display symbol that will execute the jackpot of the corresponding type is determined by performing another lottery from multiple patterns. , The stop display symbol may be determined and the winning symbol lottery may be executed in two stages.

Further, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the big hit symbol is determined by the winning symbol lottery in the special symbol lottery for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , The types of hit symbols that can be determined are configured to be different. More specifically, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, there is an increasing possibility that "10R probability variation 5" or "10R probability variation 8" will be determined in the jackpot of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol It can be said that it is easier to win a big hit with a large number of rounds than a winning symbol lottery, and it is easier to win a big hit that shifts to a high probability / high base state as a specific game state.

FIG. 11B exemplifies a small hit symbol lottery table. The small hit symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol lottery is "small hit", and the lottery method is the time of the above-mentioned big hit symbol lottery table. Is similar to.

In the small hit symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 11B, most of them win the "small hit 1" symbol, and when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing lottery is "small hit". "Small hit 2" can be determined in a part of. The small hit symbol may be of one type, or may be configured so that three or more types of symbols can be determined.

As an example of the purpose of providing a plurality of small hit symbols like the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the number of game balls that can be obtained by simply changing the opening mode of the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game. In order to separate the small hit game that makes it easy to win a V in a specific area and the small hit game that makes it difficult to win a V in a pachinko gaming machine P that uses a small hit V as a game machine specification (spec), for example. The purpose is to differentiate the small hit symbols, or to make different small hit symbols in order to separate the types of specific games to be transferred after the execution of the big hit game after the V prize is executed.

FIG. 11C illustrates an out-of-design lottery table. The missed symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol lottery is "missing", and the lottery method is the jackpot symbol lottery described above for the first special symbol. It is the same as the time of the table, and the method is different for the second special symbol.

More specifically, FIG. 11C shows only the missing symbol lottery table for the first special symbol, and in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, it is the first special symbol as the missing symbol lottery table. Only in this case, the lottery process is performed, and either "Wrong 1" or "Wrong 2" is determined as the stop display symbol.

The "Wrong Answer 2" symbol is a missed symbol that is won with a probability of about 6.4% when the first special symbol is missed, and if "Wrong Answer 2" is won, it is likely to reach in the variable pattern lottery. It is configured to facilitate the determination of a variation pattern (variation time) with reference to a special lottery table (not shown). Therefore, the "Wrong Answer 2" may be referred to as a "reach-missing symbol" or the like.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, does not have a lottery table for the second special symbol, and even if it is any symbol random number, the missing symbol of 1 is determined. The comparison process itself of the table is omitted, and it is configured to store the missing symbol of 1. It should be noted that the lottery table that always wins one symbol may be used so as to win the out-of-order symbol.

(Variable pattern lottery)
The "variable pattern lottery" is a process of determining the variable display time until the stop display symbol, which is the lottery result of the special symbol, is stopped and displayed by lottery. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol is used as the production time required to notify the effect of whether or not the effect display device P80 is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, what kind of big hit is. The fluctuation display time of is determined by using the fluctuation pattern table described later.

In FIG. 12, a gaming ball is launched into the left side region P501L of the gaming board mainly in a normal gaming state (low probability / low base medium) and a low base state (non-electric chew support state), that is, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. Represents the "low-based medium-variable pattern lottery table" in the recommended state.

The "ID" shown in FIG. 12 represents information stored as a result of performing the variation pattern lottery, and the "variation pattern" is displayed on the effect display device P80 when the ID is won. A typical example of the mode of effect of fluctuation is shown. The "variable time" is a variable display time value of the special symbol in the result of the target variable pattern lottery (variable pattern ID), and represents the time from the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display.

In FIG. 12, "Take 1 fluctuation" to "Take 4 fluctuation" indicate the number of holdings in the situation where the execution condition of the special symbol lottery is satisfied, and the result of the winning / failing lottery is "missing", and the target special symbol (here). Then, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is N, the fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of the “holding N fluctuation”. That is, the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol in the low base state is configured to make the variation pattern table to be used different depending on the number of reservations. If a game ball enters the starting winning opening in a state where there is no hold, it is temporarily stored as a hold for processing, so a fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of "Holding 1 fluctuation". To.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the variable pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the number of holdings, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the number of holdings. Although not shown, if "Wrong Answer 2 (Reach Out of Symbol)" is determined as a result of the symbol lottery, even if it is the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, the variation of 1 does not depend on the number of holdings. It is configured to perform a variation pattern lottery using a pattern table (variation pattern table for Wrong Answer 2).

“10R probability variation”, “5R probability variation”, “10R normal”, and “5R normal” in FIG. 12 indicate a variation pattern table used for a variation pattern lottery at the time of a big hit in a low base state, and the result of the winning / failing lottery. Is a "big hit", indicating that the lottery is performed by appropriately selecting a variable pattern table according to which symbol the symbol lottery result is. In FIG. 12, since the second special symbol is not the main player of the game in the low base state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table is expressed so as to be determined in a form that does not depend on the jackpot symbol, but the jackpot of the second special symbol is also expressed. , There may be a plurality of patterns depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, a specific example of the fluctuation pattern lottery in the low base state will be described with reference to FIG. As a specific example, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the random number of the fluctuation pattern is "30000" and the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation is 3 (the number of reserved balls is 2 after the start of the fluctuation). The situation in which the result of the winning / failing lottery and the winning symbol lottery are "missing 1" will be described.

First, since the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is "3", the fluctuation pattern table of "holding 3 fluctuation" is used. Similar to the lottery process in the winning / failing lottery described above, the lottery process compares (subtracts) the variable pattern random number and the random number value range corresponding to the variable pattern ID of each lottery result, and determines whether or not the random number belongs to the same range. do. By performing this process, the result of repeating the comparison operation between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random number value range at the timing of the normal fluctuation B of ID "2" becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as the fluctuation pattern lottery, which is special. After the variation display for 7 seconds is performed as the variation display of the symbol, the misaligned symbol 1 is displayed on the first special symbol display device P51.

Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state is symmetrical to that of the fluctuation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. It is configured to have a table and a table for each big hit symbol at the time of big hit. In addition, although it is configured in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 that many fluctuation patterns can be determined in common, this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, and it is determined in the low base state and the high base state. It is possible to configure the variation patterns to have very few overlaps or no overlaps at all.

In addition, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state, the shortest fluctuation time of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is obtained as the lottery result of the "ho 3 fluctuation" and "ho 4 fluctuation" of the second special symbol at the time of off. A 2-second variation (variation pattern ID "12") can be determined.

Further, as a characteristic point of the fluctuation pattern in the high base state, the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so that the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern ID “4” for 10 seconds is always determined. The reason why the first special symbol is composed of the fluctuation of 10 seconds is that the player profit is large when the jackpot is hit in the jackpot symbol lottery table shown in FIG. This is due to the fact that there are many jackpot symbols that shift to the probability fluctuation state as a specific game state), and by prioritizing and implementing a large number of variation displays corresponding to the second special symbol, a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. The purpose is to be able to acquire. Further, even when there is almost no difference in the degree of advantage of the big hit game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is based on the fact that the second special symbol priority digestion control is adopted. It is easy to hold the hold established in the normal gaming state (low base state) until the end of the specific gaming state (high base state), which is an advantageous state, avoiding variable display, and the second in the high base state. It is also an object to avoid requiring a large amount of game balls to cause the hold of the first special symbol in a low base state with respect to the amount of game balls used to generate the hold of the special symbol.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special table in a limited period and represents a special variation pattern table referenced in a specific period. FIG. 14 comprehensively describes a special fluctuation pattern table for three periods as an example of a special fluctuation pattern table provided in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P.

More specifically, in FIG. 14, the period from the first fluctuation to the fourth fluctuation after the big hit (the so-called "holding ream" (reserved inner ream), in which the four holdings existing at the time of the big hit become a big hit, is called. It is easy to select the reach fluctuation of 55 seconds, which is referred to in the nth to mth fluctuations after the big hit and the "reserved inner consecutive villa table" (for IDs "51" and "71") referred to in the period). It is referred to in the high frequency reach table (for IDs "52", "53", "54", "72") and the final fluctuation display in the high base state, and the "result effect" described later is mainly executed. It is shown that the "result fluctuation table" (for IDs "55" and "73") to be used is provided in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P.

Such a special variation pattern table referred to in a limited period is referred to as a "special variation pattern table" or a "limited frequency (pattern table)".

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the reference period of the limited frequency pattern table can be referred to in a predetermined period after the big hit game (operation of a special electric accessory, in other words, operation of a continuous accessory operation device). is doing. Regarding these reference periods, it is possible to make the presence or absence of reference different depending on the type of jackpot (big hit symbol), and the reference period can be set in a specific period after the operation of the special electric accessory based on the small hit game. It can also be configured to be different. What kind of special fluctuation pattern table is referred to under what circumstances can be appropriately set for each pachinko gaming machine, and is not limited to the illustrated ones, and the details should be explained separately if necessary. And.

Next, the control of the effect control board P41 that controls the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, will be described. The operation control of the effect control board P41 has few restrictions on the type test of the gaming machine, and has a higher degree of freedom in design than the control of the main control board P40, and is therefore described in the following description. It is not limited only to the processing, and the timing at which the processing is performed can be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on processing of production control board-main loop processing]
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the power-on process (step 4000) is executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41. Here, the details of the power-on processing of the effect control board P41 will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process (step 4000) is started on the effect control board P41 of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the initial setting process related to the operation of the CPU, which is an arithmetic unit provided on the effect control board P41, is performed. (Step 4002). The initial setting process appropriately performs the settings necessary for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details are omitted. However, regarding the effect that was executed in the state where the power was cut off last time, the main control board P40 Since there is a time lag between the completion of the power-on process (FIG. 7) and the power-on process of the effect control board (FIG. 15), if the effect is restored to the effect before the power failure after the power is restored, the operation of the main control board P40 will occur. Since there is a risk of misalignment, in the initial processing when the effect control board P41 is restored from power failure, the effect information and the like are often initialized so that the effect that was executed before the power failure is not executed (“effect”. It is called "control board reset" or "sub reset").

(Main loop of production control board)
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the process shifts to the main loop process after the initial setting process. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the time of the cycle (frame) for drawing the effect image on the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is to draw 30 times per second. Since the cycle is set to about 33 ms (30 FPS), the main loop processing loop is configured to be performed once in a cycle of 16 ms, which is about half of the cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

In the main loop process of the effect control board P41, first, the watchdog timer for detecting the runaway of the CPU is cleared (step 4004).

Subsequently, a process of updating the effect control random number data (step 4006) is performed, and various effect control random numbers used when an opportunity to execute the effect lottery occurs are updated.

Next, the input port monitoring process is executed (step 4008). The premise of the pachinko gaming machine P is designed to monitor the input port even during the interrupt processing of the effect control board P41, which will be described later, but the input port monitoring processing in the main loop processing is monitoring with a 16 ms cycle. Therefore, the monitoring of the input of the switch or the like, which is a necessary monitoring target on the system, is limited, and the monitoring of the input of the sensors or the like necessary for the effect control of the effect movable accessory P560 is omitted. As a modification, the sensors to be monitored in the production may be confirmed by the input port monitoring process in the main loop process.

Similar to the input port confirmation process on the main control board, the content to be executed in the input port monitoring process is the process of generating and storing level data from the input data of various sensors and storing the rising (falling) data. Will be done.

Subsequently, the effect control board P41 performs the effect device control process (step 4010) to execute control related to the effect operation other than the effect display device P80 (image display). Examples of the effect device controlled in this process include a lamp P82 (“board lamp (P550)” and “frame lamp (P350)”), a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), and an effect movable accessory P560. For these effect devices, an effect operation command corresponding to the effect content determined to be executed by a process such as an effect control process (step 4012) described later is transmitted to each effect device to execute the effect operation.

Since the output of the effect operation command to the various effect devices in the effect device control process (step 4010) needs to be executed (started) in synchronization with the effect image displayed on the effect display device P80 (image display device). , A signal transmitted from the image control board P42 controlling the effect display device P80 to the effect control board P41 at regular intervals and a signal for forcibly synchronizing are received (the above-mentioned input port monitoring process). (Reception in) as an opportunity to synchronize with the effect switching timing of the effect display device P80, and output the effect operation command to various effect devices.

As for the operation control of the effect movable accessory P560 in the effect device, the effect set in this process is set because the drive means of the effect movable accessory P560 needs to be controlled in a shorter cycle. Regarding the operation pattern of the effect movable accessory P560 to be executed by the operation command, the sensor monitoring and operation switching are executed even during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) of the effect control board P41 described later.

Next, the effect control process (step 4012) executed in the main loop process of the effect control board P41 will be described. In the effect control process, the flag established based on the result of analyzing the effect control command received from the main control board P40 in the effect control command analysis process described later and the information of the received effect control command itself (lottery result ID of special symbol lottery, etc.) ), Input port monitoring process (step 4008), interrupt process (FIG. 16), and other processes. Is.

The effect control process selects the effect determination process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes the submodule process for the corresponding effect decision. As an example of the effect content determined here, the process of determining the variation effect corresponding to one change of the special symbol based on the commands (win / fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command) related to the execution result of the special symbol lottery. (Processing to determine the content of the notice and reach, the decorative pattern to be stopped, etc.), and the look-ahead effect for the newly generated hold based on the hold number information and pre-judgment information sent when the hold occurs (" The pre-reading lottery process that determines whether or not to execute the "pre-judgment effect") and the effect content during the special game are determined based on the information sent as the effect control command when the special game (big hit or small hit) is executed. There is a special game production content determination process to be performed.

Further, the effect control process is not only the process for the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, but also the error display content determination process (error transmitted from the main control board) when an error is detected on the effect control board P41. (Including the process of determining the error display content based on information), adjusting the volume output from the speaker P83 based on the input operation of the effect button P381, the cross key P383, etc., which is the effect operation means P81 by the player, and the lamp P82. It also executes the determination of the effect contents such as the adjustment of the amount of light for changing the emission brightness of the and the customization of the effect contents and the effect determination tendency.

It should be noted that, as for the process of determining various effect contents performed in the sub-module process called in the effect control process, specifications specific to each gaming machine are often used, so the explanation is omitted and the subject of the invention is made. When the processing having a feature is executed in the pachinko gaming machine P, the details will be described in the description of the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine P which is the object of the invention.

Returning to the description of the main loop processing of the effect control board, the effect control command analysis process (step 4014) will be described as the final process of the main loop process.

The effect control command analysis process is based on the information stored as the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, and the information corresponding to the effect control command to be used for determining the effect content in the above-mentioned effect control process. And set the flag. In this processing, it is necessary to determine the processing content according to the command transmitted from the main control board P40, and the processing content is determined from the contents of the MODE data and EVENT data which are the effect control commands, and the effect control command is responded to. Processing is executed.

As for the effect control command, one command (MODE data and EVENT data) may be transmitted for each interrupt process (every 4 ms) of the main control board P40. Until the main loop processing cycle (16 ms) of the board P41 elapses, the analysis of the effect control command is repeatedly executed as much as possible (step 4016).

[Interrupt processing of production control board]
Next, the interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control board P41 will be described. The interrupt processing on the effect control board P41 is different from the interrupt processing on the main control board, and has a plurality of interrupt processing started at different execution triggers (see FIGS. 16A and 16B). Priority is set for these multiple interrupt processes, and when an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, the higher interrupt process is executed even while the interrupt process is being executed. Is controlled by. In this description, the effect control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16 (A)) and the effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16 (B)) will be described as representatives.

(Effect control timer interrupt processing)
The effect control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16A) is an interrupt process executed in a 1 ms cycle in the CPU of the effect control board P41.

The port input / output process (step 5002) is performed by inputting a sensor provided for detecting the position of the effect movable accessory P560 or another sensor (input sensor of the effect operation means P81) from the input port of the effect control board P41. Drives from the output port to the drive means (such as solenoids and stepping motors) of the effect movable accessory P560 according to the operation pattern set in the effect device control process and the process of generating and storing level data and rise data from. The process of outputting a signal is executed. When data is output from the output port, the data in the counter (storage area) that counts the number of outputs is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process of subtracting or adding a timer for measuring the switching timing of the effect operation. When the update process for each timer is completed, a comparison operation with the comparison value is performed to determine whether or not a switching condition for the effect operation has occurred, and information necessary for determining the effect content in the effect control process (step 4012). Performs the process of storing the flag in the storage area.

In the sensor monitoring process (step 5006), the sensor detection information related to the switching of the effect operation, such as whether or not the effect operation switching condition of the effect movable accessory P560 is satisfied, is obtained from the sensor detection data generated by the port input / output process. It is determined whether or not the occurrence of the above is generated, a process of switching the table of the operation pattern is performed, and a process of setting a condition flag for determining the effect content is performed in the effect control process (step 4012).

The effect button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process for determining whether or not the effect switching condition is satisfied based on the input of the effect button P381, the lever P382, the cross key P383, etc., which are the effect operation means P81. In the effect button monitoring process, the level data indicating the input state of each input device generated in the port input / output process (step 5002) and the rise data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous off to the current on) are used for the effect. It is determined whether or not the operation means P81 is operated and the operation mode is determined.

For example, when the rising data is generated as the input information for the effect operation means P81, it is assumed that the player has operated the effect operation means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding effect is stored. .. If the input is judged only by the rising data, it may be erroneously detected due to electrical noise and the effect operation may be switched. Therefore, after the rising data is generated, the level data (on-data) is input multiple times. It may be determined that the player operation (may be expressed as "single push (single pull) operation" or "single blow operation") for the effect operation means P81 triggered by the continuous operation.

Further, when the on-input level data is continuously detected 500 times, that is, when it is determined that the effect operating means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined that the operation is "long press (long press)". It is configured to be treated as a special operation. In addition, the fall data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous on to the off this time) may be electrically detected as noise when determining whether or not to perform the "long press (long press)" operation and whether to continue. In this case as well, as in the case of the above-mentioned false detection prevention measures, after the fall data is detected, the input of the "long press (long press)" operation is input based on the detection of multiple level data (off data) inputs. It may be used to determine the end.

Then, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, depending on the content of the effect being executed, the effect operation means once at regular intervals (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by executing the "long press" operation on the effect button P381. It is possible to repeat the process of assuming that there was a "single push (single pull)" input operation on P81, and in this way, with a special operation such as a "long press (long pull)" operation as an opportunity, It is called an "automatic continuous hit" operation that the repeated processing is executed assuming that the "single push" operation has been performed. The "automatic continuous hitting" operation is not limited to the operation content illustrated, but can be performed by simultaneously operating a plurality of effect operation means P81 or by operating an on / off operation such as a DIP switch provided as a switch different from the effect button. It is also possible to adopt a method in which it is considered that the "automatic continuous hitting" operation is executed based on the input of the effect button P381.

The input to the effect operation means P81 has a period treated as an effective operation (“operation valid period”) and a period treated as an invalid operation (“operation invalid period”) depending on the execution status of the effect.

The multitasking process (step 5010) is the effect control generated this time according to the value of the task counter (updated between the values "0" and "15") that is updated every time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed. This is a process performed by different processing contents to be executed during the timer interrupt process. The task counter is configured to circulate in a cycle of 16 ms, and the process at each counter value is configured to be executed substantially in synchronization with one cycle of the main loop process. As an example of processing in each task, whether or not the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed is determined based on the signal transmitted from the image control board P42 (input information is generated by port input / output processing), and an image is displayed. A process of monitoring the operating status of the control board P42 is performed.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) includes an image control command (“inter-sub command”) so that the CPU of the image control board P42 executes an image display according to the effect content determined by the effect control process P41. This is a process of transmitting (sometimes called) to the CPU of the image control board P42. Although the image control board P42 and the effect control board P41 may be made of the same board, they are described as the image control board P42 in the present specification for convenience.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the effect control board P41 comprises an image control command consisting of a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command specifying a pattern of display content, and the image control board P42 has an image control command. It is configured to send.

The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, is configured to transmit image control commands by the effect control timer interrupt process, but the transmission / reception of commands between the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42 is separately performed. It is also possible to provide interrupt processing to perform transmission and reception.

(Direction control command reception interrupt)
The effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16 (B)) outputs a strobe signal in the effect control command transmission process (step 2040) in the interrupt process (FIG. 9) of the main control board P40, and outputs the strobe signal to the effect control board. This is an interrupt process generated when P41 receives a signal.

When the effect control board P41 starts the effect control command reception interrupt, the effect control board P41 reads the effect control command (MODE data or EVENT data) transmitted from the output port of the main control board P40, and updates and stores the temporary buffer data (step). 5502, step 5504).

When the update of the temporary buffer data is completed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the effect control command (combination of MODE data and EVENT data) of 1 is completed (step 5506). The effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40 is composed of "1" and "0" for specific bits in the 1-byte data.

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, a process of storing the contents of the effect control command received this time is normally performed in the lower 1-byte storage area. At this time, if it is indicated that a specific bit part of the lower 1 byte of the storage area of the current temporary buffer data is MODE data before the update, the storage data of the temporary buffer data is shifted to the upper 1 byte storage area. After the data is stored, the EVENT data received this time is stored in the lower 1-byte storage area of the temporary buffer data.

Then, in the determination of the completion of reception of the effect control command in step 5506, it is determined whether or not the specific bit of the lower 1 byte of the temporary buffer data is the data indicating the EVENT data, and it is determined that the data is the EVENT data. In that case, the process proceeds to the next process assuming that the reception of the effect control command of 1 is completed (step 5506YES), and when it is determined that the data is MODE data (step 5506NO), the EVENT data is transmitted from the main control board P40. Until the strobe signal based on the above is received, the effect control command reception interrupt is exited, other processing is performed, and the process waits.

When it is determined in step 5506 that the reception of the effect control command is completed, it is determined whether or not the transmitted effect control command is normal (step 5508). This process is determined based on, for example, whether or not matching data exists in the list data of the effect control commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P40. Then, when it is determined that the command is normal, it is stored in the storage area for storing the received effect control command so as to be analyzed by the effect control command analysis process during the effect control timer interrupt process. In case of abnormal data, the temporary buffer data is discarded.

[Example of basic image display]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the basic production of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a symbol variation display (during a stop display of a decorative symbol) during a normal game (low probability / low base), and FIG. 18 shows a reach effect with a high expectation of being a big hit. It is a figure showing the situation. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during the operation of the electric chew support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability / high base). It is a figure that was made.

(Example of effect display in normal game state)
《Decorative pattern》
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a symbol variation display (during a stop display of a decorative symbol) during a normal game (low probability / low base). Three numbers are displayed in a substantially central area of the screen in a manner that can be clearly confirmed by the player. These three symbols are called "decorative symbols (P801)" (also called "designation"), and are dramatic displays displayed in response to the result of the special symbol lottery, and the variation of the special symbols. It is displayed in a variable manner according to the display. Although it is represented only by numbers in FIG. 17, each number may be displayed with a decorative image such as a character image. Further, when it is configured to display each number with a decorative image, the decorative image and the display mode of each number may be different depending on the game state. With such a configuration, the player can easily determine the current gaming state.

The decorative symbol P801 is subjected to variable display as one effect for one variation display of the special symbol (one special symbol lottery), except when a special effect is performed. Although not shown, when the decorative symbol P801 is variablely displayed, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (transparently displayed or hidden in some cases) at high speed, and the image of the animation or effect is displayed. A production called "notice" will be used to raise expectations for the acquisition of rights to big hit games.

The decorative symbol P801 shown in FIG. 17 is scrolled in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) when the variable display is started, and then the left symbol (P801a), the right symbol (P801c), and the middle symbol (P801b) are displayed in this order. The stop display symbol determined by the effect control board P41 is stopped and displayed for each symbol row. Generally, when three decorative symbols P801 are stopped and displayed in the same manner (doublet), it is provided to inform the effect that it is a big hit. Further, a state in which one symbol is displayed in a variable manner while another symbol is displayed, for example, the left symbol before the middle symbol P801b, which is the last symbol to stop (also referred to as “final stop symbol”), stops. The state in which the right symbol is displayed (temporarily stopped display) with the same symbol is called "reach" ("reach state" or "reach mode").

The variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a form of scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom), but the variable display mode is not limited to the vertical direction, and the front-back direction (horizontal direction and depth) are used. The scroll display operation may be performed in the (diagonal) direction, or the rotation operation may be performed on the spot without scrolling and the switching display may be performed in order.

Further, the decorative symbol P801 has a case where the stop display is performed a plurality of times during the variable display of the special symbol once. At this time, when the stop display is performed a plurality of times, the stop display indicating the result of the special lottery is a stop display displayed at the same time as the stop display symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. The stop display at timings other than the above is called "temporary stop (display)". In addition, the stop display at the same time as the stop display of the special symbol may be expressed as "main stop".

When the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol P801 is not completely fixed in order to distinguish it from the final stop display (main stop) of the decorative symbol P801, and the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped to the extent that it is not recognized as fixed. It is configured to move, move in a direction such as up and down or left and right, and swing around one rotation axis. Such a state may be expressed as "sway fluctuation" in addition to the temporary stop.

After the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display may be repeated again. Generally, the re-variation from the state where the symbols other than the jackpot symbol are temporarily stopped is called "pseudo-variation (pseudo-ream)" effect. , The re-variation that may change the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed after the jackpot symbol is stopped is called "promotion (variation)" effect. When the promotion effect is executed, it may be configured not to be changed to a jackpot symbol that is more disadvantageous than the stopped jackpot symbol, or may be configured not to be changed to a lost symbol.

In addition, when the decorative symbol P801 is stopped and displayed, there is a kind of special decorative symbol that is not displayed during the normal variable display and is displayed only when a part of the effect is executed. (P804) ”(special symbol). The special design has a meaning in each symbol, for example, suggesting that a specific jackpot is executed, suggesting that the above-mentioned pseudo-variation effect is performed, or a specific reach effect (reach mode). The notice effect displayed in the case) suggests that the execution is performed. When a special symbol is used, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) that is temporarily stopped at the end, or one of the left symbol P801a, the middle symbol P801b, and the right symbol P801c are all substituted. A special symbol may be temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol.

<< Simple drawing (mini drawing) >>
In the upper right of the screen, three numbers displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol P801 are displayed. This symbol is also called "simple design (P802)"("simplifieddesign") or "mini design", and like the above-mentioned "decorative design", it shows the lottery result of the special design according to the variable display of the special design. It is displayed as a display object.

The simple design P802 (mini design) is different from the "decorative design" in that the special design showing the result of the special lottery is a special design even when the decorative design P801 is not stopped and displayed. In accordance with the display on the display devices P51 and P52, the stop display is always performed once for each special symbol lottery.

Further, the variable display of the simplified design P802 may be configured to form the same reach mode when the above-mentioned decorative symbol P801 has the reach mode, and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified. In order to achieve the minimum purpose, even if a simple variable display method is adopted, such as a constant display switching is performed until the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of the decorative symbol P801. good.

<< Hold display area >>
A hold display area P810 is provided in the lower area of FIG. In the hold display area P810, the hold object P811 corresponding to the hold (random value) corresponding to the unexercised right is displayed as the right of the special symbol lottery acquired by the player. In the example of FIG. 17, three special symbol lottery rights are reserved.

In the example of FIG. 17, the earlier the special symbol lottery is executed (that is, the earlier hold) is displayed at a position closer to the substantially center direction at the bottom of the screen, and the hold display area P810 is displayed. The display position of the reserved object located on the far right side of is called "Ho 1 (display area)", and as it goes to the left side of the screen, "Ho 2 (display area)", "Ho 3 (display area)", and "Ho 4 (ho 4) Display area) ".

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the hold display area P810, an object having substantially the same mode as the hold object P811 of the hold display area P810 is displayed at a higher position than the hold object P811. This display area continuously displays the hold display corresponding to the random number value that triggered the start of the current special symbol change display from the hold display area, and is referred to as "the change object display area (P812)". .. Further, the object displayed in the variable object display area P812 is referred to as "the variable object (P813)", but may be referred to as "the pending display" or the like, and is differentiated from the reserved object P811 in the reserved display area P810. Therefore, the acronym "corresponding" is added.

The display mode of the variable object P813 in the variable object display area P812 does not have to be completely the same as that of the reserved object P811, and the reserved display accompanying the start of the variable movement is moved and displayed in the variable object display area P812. At that time, the shape may be changed or disappeared (hidden). Further, the variable object P813 may be configured so that the display mode can be changed in the same manner as the hold display in the hold change look-ahead described later (for example, the shape and color of the object change at the timing in the middle of the change display). ).

《Simple hold display》
Two numbers are displayed side by side in the vertical direction at the substantially center position in the height direction on the left side of the screen. These two numbers represent the current number of holdings of the first special symbol and the number of holdings of the second special symbol, and are called "simple holding display (P814)". In the example in FIG. 17, the reserved number of the first special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "3" displayed above, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "4" displayed below. ..

(Look-ahead production)
《Pending change look-ahead》
Further, in FIG. 17, the hold object P811 in the hold 3 display area in the hold display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the hold object P811 in the display areas of the hold 2 and the hold 1. The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, is configured so that the display mode of the hold object P811 of the hold 3 is more likely to be a big hit than the display mode of the hold object P811 of the hold 2. In this way, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold object P811 and displaying it for a specific hold is called "hold change (look-ahead)".

It should be noted that the mode is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 17, and has a plurality of types of change modes, each of which is configured so that the possibility of a big hit (expectation degree) can be different, and the reserved object P811 is stepwise. The display mode of the above may be changed.

In addition, not limited to "hold change (look-ahead)", when the random value stored as hold is determined as the execution target of the effect, the variable display corresponding to the hold that is the execution target of the effect is started. A production that suggests that there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit on hold, which was the target of the production prior to the execution of the production, is called a "look-ahead effect" (sometimes referred to as a "pre-judgment effect"). I'm out.

Then, when the "look-ahead effect" is executed, the hold determined as the hold for which the effect is executed may be referred to as "look-ahead target hold", "trigger hold", "criminal hold", or the like. , The change display of the special symbol based on the look-ahead target hold is referred to as "look-ahead target change", "trigger change", "criminal change" and the like.

Here, as a "look-ahead effect", some typical ones that can be adopted in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be illustrated.

《Chance look ahead》
In "chance pre-reading", in the variation display of the decorative symbol P801 until the fluctuation of the pre-reading target variation is started, the stop display symbol of the decorative symbol P801 according to a predetermined rule is stopped display (or provisional stop display). It is a production to be done. As an example of the rule of the stop display mode of the decorative symbol P801 predetermined as a chance eye, (a) when the color of the numerical part of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by combining only the same symbols, (b). When the stop symbols of decorative symbols such as "1", "2", "3", "5", "4", and "3" are displayed in a regular stop display mode such as in order (forward order, reverse order). (C) When a special number such as "7" or a symbol different from the number such as "destination" is stopped and displayed as a stop display symbol of the middle symbol.

《Pre-reading of movable characters》
"Pre-reading the effect movable accessory" reads ahead the effect movable accessory P560 or the frame movable accessory P360 (such as the lever P382 of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P1) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3). It is a production that makes a lively operation from the start of the fluctuation according to the effect operation pattern, straddling the variation until the variation display of the target variation is started or the look-ahead target variation.

《Zone transition look-ahead》
"Zone transition look-ahead" shifts to a special effect mode (called "zone") in the change display of the special symbol before the look-ahead target change starts, and is special until the change display that becomes the look-ahead target change. It is a look-ahead effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit by executing a notice lottery for executing a notice effect corresponding to a different effect mode. For example, "display normal background-> display background when pre-reading-> big hit" or "display normal background-> display background when pre-reading-> stop off symbol and return to normal background".

(Display example when executing reach production)
Next, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a situation in which a reach effect with a high expectation of becoming a big hit is being performed. As described above, the "reach effect" is a situation in which decorative symbols (left symbol P801a, right symbol P801c) other than one decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and one more symbol is displayed. It refers to the production in a state where it is notified that a big hit will occur if the vehicle stops in the same mode.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, in many cases, the specifications are such that the three decorative symbols P801 have the same stop display mode via the reach effect to notify the jackpot.

In the example of FIG. 18, the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c of the decorative symbol are displayed as "5", and "4", "5", and "6" are displayed as the symbols of the changing medium symbol row. It shows a situation where the "4" symbol vibrates violently and if it switches to "5", it becomes a big hit.

Here, in the example of FIG. 18, the display of the left symbol and the right symbol “5” of the decorative symbol is displayed smaller than the decorative symbol P801 at the time of the stop display of FIG. 17, and the middle symbol in the variable display is displayed. The decorative symbol P801b in the column is displayed larger than the decorative symbol P801 at the time of stop display and is highlighted. The small decorative symbol corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c at this time may be referred to as a "evacuation symbol (P803)", a "reach symbol", or the like. In the reach effect, in addition to the illustrated example, it is notified whether or not the animation of the notice effect (reach effect) displayed along with the variable display of the decorative pattern will be a big hit depending on the end. In some cases, the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c that have already been temporarily stopped are displayed (or hidden) in a smaller size than the retracted symbol P803 so that the visibility of the effect that the player wants to pay attention to is enhanced. ing.

Further, a gaming machine or the like in which the number of decorative symbols P801 displayed is not three is known, and there is also a multi-line reach or the like that forms a reach mode of a plurality of rows at the same time, but a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As an exception to the reach effect, there is a reach effect called "full rotation reach" in which all three decorative symbols P801 are synchronously and variablely displayed in the same manner. What is the standard for reach production, "a situation in which decorative symbols other than one decorative symbol are displayed in the same mode, and a state in which it is notified that a big hit will occur if one more symbol stops in the same mode". Although the situation is different, full rotation reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach effect.

Further, in FIG. 18, the “effect setting display area (P850)” is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 18, the volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The effect setting display area P850 includes a volume setting function for adjusting the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the gaming machine P, a light amount adjusting function for adjusting the emission brightness of the decorative lamp P82 of the gaming machine P, and an effect mode. This is an area for displaying the setting status and the change status of the effect mode change function for changing the type of the notice effect to be generated and the frequency of occurrence of the advance notice effect.

The effect setting display area P850 is not always displayed, and is temporarily displayed when the player performs an operation related to the various effect settings (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function, effect mode change function) described above. It is displayed, and for example, it is possible to display the effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. 18 by operating the cross key P383 in the left-right direction. In the situation of FIG. 18, when the right button of the cross key P383 is further operated by the player, the set volume level (black area in the figure) increases, and the volume setting value starts from "3". It has come to change to "4".

Further, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, when adjusting the amount of light, the change operation is configured to be performed by operating the cross key P383 in the vertical direction, and the effect mode change function is configured according to the operation of the effect button. An example is given in which the production modes are switched in a predetermined order. It should be noted that the operations related to these effect settings may adopt different operation modes in relation to the execution of the effect during the game, and can be appropriately adopted in addition to the illustrated setting change method.

Further, regarding the display of the effect setting display area P850 and the use of various effect setting functions, it is possible to set a period during which the player's effect setting operation is valid and a period during which the player's effect setting operation is invalid. When executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the use of various effect setting functions is invalidated.

(Example of production display during big hit game)
Subsequently, based on FIG. 19, a display mode of the effect in a state where the big hit game is being executed on the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described.

<< Production display showing the type of jackpot >>
At the lower left of the screen and the upper right of the screen of FIG. 19, the decorative symbol P801 that triggered the execution of the big hit game is displayed. The lower left of the screen displays the decorative symbol P801 (also referred to as "big hit design (P805)") of 1 in a display mode smaller than the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, as in the case of executing the reach effect described above, and the upper right of the screen. Continues to display the simplified drawing P802 displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is completed.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the type of jackpot executed by the player and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot are determined by the type of the decorative symbol P801 that triggered the occurrence of the jackpot (stopped and displayed when the jackpot occurred). It suggests the degree of expectation of the game and the game state (normal game state) after the big hit. Therefore, by displaying the decorative symbols (big hit design P805, simple symbol P802) that triggered the execution of the jackpot in this way, the type of jackpot and the number of game balls expected to be acquired can be determined even during the jackpot game. It is possible to suggest.

Further, as a display indicating the type of the jackpot, in FIG. 19, an icon image P821 imitating a pentagonal shield is displayed under the character string "ROUND6" (referred to as "round display (P820)"). The character "MAX" is written in the center of P821. The icon P821 in the figure is a jackpot suggested by the character string "MAX", and indicates that the maximum round jackpot game possessed by the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is executed. This icon P821 is called a "big hit icon" or a "ream villa (display) icon", and each time a specific game state and a big hit game are repeatedly executed, the display increases cumulatively side by side, so-called "ream villa". It is an effect display that informs the player how many times and what kind of jackpot has been won in the state so that the player can understand.

Although not shown, in the premised pachinko gaming machine P, "○○ bonus!" (Notifying the maximum round jackpot) and "○○ bonus!" By displaying "△△ chance" (suggesting a big hit that is not the maximum round), an effect of notifying the player of the type of big hit is executed.

In addition, even if it is suggested that the jackpot is a big hit such as "△△ chance" where the number of rounds to be executed is small, the execution round of the jackpot is set as "extra bonus! + ○ round" during the jackpot round. In fact, it is also possible to execute a "big hit promotion effect" such as notifying that it is a big hit in the maximum round.

In addition, the "big hit promotion effect" is also used when it is suggested that a big hit game that shifts to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the previously notified type of big hit is being executed. There are times. For example, from the production of a big hit game (called "non-probable variable big hit" or "normal big hit") that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the big hit game, the big hit game ("" There is a production display such that the production display is switched to the production of "probability change jackpot" and "specific jackpot").

<< Production display showing the progress of the jackpot game >>
Next, when the jackpot game is executed, the effect display showing the progress of the jackpot game will be described. In FIG. 19, as an effect showing a big hit effect display, a “round display (P820)” executed by a character string display of “ROUND_〇” at the upper left of the screen, and a character string display of “TOTAL_〇〇pt” at the lower right of the screen. Examples include the "acquired ball number display (P822)" executed in, and the "count display (P825)" displayed by 10 circular image objects in the center of the right side of the screen. Although not shown, an image display such as an animation called "round effect" is displayed in addition to these displays during the big hit game.

《Round display》
The "round display (P820)" is a display indicating the number of rounds of the round game (unit game) being executed during the big hit game. The numerical value on the right side of "ROUND" is updated at the timing when the round game is started. The example of FIG. 19 shows a situation in which a round game of the sixth round is being executed.

The "round display (p820)" does not necessarily have to be synchronized with the number of execution rounds during the actual jackpot game. For example, in the above-mentioned "small hit V" spec, the small hit game may be counted as the first round, and the first round of the big hit game executed after winning the V may be treated as the second round. Further, in another example, when the opening pattern of the large winning opening P751 in the round game ends with the transition to the easy entry state for a short time, the value of the "round display" is not updated and the large winning opening is not updated. Only when the opening pattern of is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball for a long time, it may be treated as a substantially executed round "substantial round".

《Display the number of acquired balls》
The "number of acquired balls display (P822)" sandwiches the specific game with the "display of the number of acquired balls (P823 * not shown)" that displays the number of game balls accumulated in one big hit game being executed. There is a type such as "cumulative acquired ball number display (824)" that displays the cumulative number of game balls acquired in a plurality of big hits. FIG. 19 shows an example in which the “cumulative acquired ball number display (P824)”, which is a 5-digit acquired ball number display, is displayed. The "big hit winning ball number display (P823)" and the "cumulative winning ball number display (P824)" may be displayed simultaneously in parallel.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the cumulative number of winning balls paid out based on the number of balls entered into the big winning opening P751 during the big hit game is displayed for the "number of acquired balls display (P822)". However, as the cumulative target of the prize ball payout of the acquired ball number display P822, the payouts based on the winning balls to the general winning opening P731 and the second starting winning opening P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game board P5 are cumulatively added. You may.

Further, as another modification, the display period of the "acquired ball number display (P822)" may be displayed not only during the big hit game but also during the execution of the specific game, or the "acquired ball number display (P822)". The addition period of the cumulative prize ball payout number may be configured to be extended not only during the big hit game but also during the specific game or the small hit game.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, in addition to the "number of acquired balls displayed (P822)", the accumulated number of prize balls paid out is divided into "2500 balls", "5000 balls", "10000 balls", etc. Only in special situations such as when the number of payouts is reached, it is possible to execute the "separated number of acquired balls display" effect in addition to the "acquired ball number display" to notify the player (for example, "GET 10000! ! ”).

《Count display》
The "count display (P825)" indicates how many balls can be entered up to the number of game balls set as the closing condition of the large winning opening P751 in one round game, or how many ball balls can be entered in this round game. It is a display indicating whether or not the ball has entered the large winning opening P751. The former is displayed as a shaded circular object in FIG. 19, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object as a two-column object display at a substantially center position on the right side of the screen.

In the example of FIG. 19, as the game of the sixth round, 5 balls have already been entered into the big winning opening (displayed as a white circular object), and 5 more balls can be entered (with a shaded circular object). Display) is indicated by the count display P825. The display of the count display P825 is reset to the initial mode each time a new round is started.

During the execution of the round game of the big hit game, the number of game balls exceeds the closing condition of the big winning opening P751 in succession to the game balls that satisfy the closing condition of the big winning opening P751 depending on the flow condition of the game ball. Winning may occur, and the occurrence of winning of the number of game balls exceeding such a closing condition is called "over winning".

Although not shown, when an "over prize" occurs, a special effect is performed using the object display of the count display P825, or a special light emission of the effect lamp P82 or a special sound effect is emitted from the speaker P83. It may be notified by such means. Further, with respect to the above-mentioned acquired ball number display P822, the number of prize balls paid out based on the prize that is the “over prize” may be added or excluded from the addition.

<< Other production display during big hit game >>
Next, another effect display in which the effect display is executed in FIG. 19 will be described.

First, the two numbers displayed at the substantially center position on the left side of the screen are the above-mentioned simple hold display P814.

The display "Sound_2" displayed on the right side of the decorative design (big hit design P805) at the lower left of the screen is "selected music display (P854)" indicating the title of the music being played during the current big hit game. .. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the player can arbitrarily select the music to be played by operating the effect button P381 and the cross key P383 during the first and second rounds during the big hit game. Has specifications. Regarding the selected music display P854, when the music can be changed, an image "Can be changed with the (up) (down) key" is displayed in the vicinity of the selected music display P854 as shown in FIG.

It should be noted that the selection of the effect during such a big hit game is not limited to the selection of music, but it is also possible to change the round effect and select the effect (effect mode) during the specific game after the big hit game (collectively). (Called "Production Customized Display (P853)"), detailed explanations of them are omitted.

Finally, the "right-handed" and right-hand arrow symbols displayed at the bottom of the simplified drawing P802 at the upper right of the screen are image displays related to "separate notification (P830)" (also called "recommended launch position notification"). Is. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, since it is recommended to launch a game ball into the right area P501R of the game area during the big hit game, "right-handed notification (P832)" ("right-handed") (Display of the character string and the right arrow symbol) is being executed.

The "separate notification" may be displayed not only during the big hit game but also during the game in the specific game state or during the game in the normal game state. In particular, in a situation where the game state is switched (occurrence / end of a big hit or generation / end of a specific game state), a larger size display than the separate notification P830 shown in FIG. 19 so that the player can easily recognize it. Is temporarily displayed in the center of the screen or the like to notify the player of the recommended firing position in the next gaming state.

In addition, in the "separation notification (P830)", the one that is temporarily displayed in a large size at the timing of the transition of the game state is the "first distribution notification image" ("right-handed large display (P831)", " Left-handed large display (P833) "), and the recommended firing position in the game state during the big hit game or the specific game state is displayed for almost the entire period during which the game state continues. It may be expressed as "notification image" ("right-handed small display (P832)", "left-handed small display (P834)").

In addition, as another type of effect of "striking notification (P830)", when a situation in which a game ball is launched at a position other than the recommended launch position is detected, for example, the left area of the game area during a big hit. "Left-handed warning notice" ("Right-handed warning (P835)" that alerts the player that the game ball should be fired in the right area P501R of the game area when the game ball is fired in P501L. ) To display a message such as "Please hit right". In a situation where the recommended firing position and the player's actual firing position are opposite to each other, the "right-handed warning notification" ("left-handed warning notification (P936)") is executed.

(Example of effect display during a specific game state)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability / high base). Although a wide variety of production displays are shown in the figure, the explanations for those explained in the above explanation are omitted, and the production displays that have not been explained so far and the differences from the above explanations. An explanation will be given regarding the effect display having.

First, as the effect display that has not been explained so far, the "effect mode display (P840)" and the "remaining game count display (P841)" will be described as the effect display during the specific game state.

《Production mode display》
The "effect mode display (P840)" is a display showing the state of the current effect display mode, and is a display indicating that the advance notice effect corresponding to the corresponding mode is drawn by the state information called the effect mode. .. When the effect mode display is different, the types of advance notice effects that are visually recognized by the player are generally made so that the impression given to the appearance is significantly different, although there are some common advance notice effects. .. In FIG. 20, the display "RUSH_MODE" is made, and the display indicating that the gaming state in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" (high probability / high base state) is displayed. ing.

In addition to notifying the effect mode in the specific game state, the "effect mode display (P840)" may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), or one game. When the state has a plurality of effect modes, the display may be temporarily performed each time the condition for switching the effect mode is satisfied, or may be continuously performed until the effect mode ends.

《Display the number of remaining games》
The "remaining game count display (P841)" is the number of variable display of the special symbol until the end of the specific game state (the number of special symbol lottery) and the variable display of the special symbol until the current production mode ends. It is a display showing the number of times. In FIG. 20, the display of "remaining_56" is executed at the upper center of the screen, and the game state of "ST (number of times cut probability change)" is performed until 56 more special symbol lottery is executed. Notify the person.

Next, in the effect display example of the specific game state shown in FIG. 20, a display different from the effect display example in the other game states described above will be described.

<< Decorative design (specific game state) >>
In the center of the screen of FIG. 20, a variable display of the decorative symbol P801 is displayed. In the effect display example of the decorative symbol P801 in the specific game state of FIG. 20, the display of the decorative symbol P801 is displayed smaller than that of the decorative symbol P801 of the effect display example in the normal gaming state of FIG. 20.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as the effect display of the specific game state, the effect mode display P840, the remaining number of games display P841, and the jackpot icon display P821 are displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the selected music is displayed at the lower part of the screen. P854 and P824 for displaying the number of acquired balls are performed. In the specific gaming state, such an additional display that is not displayed in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) is performed. Therefore, if the decorative symbol P801 is displayed in the same size as the normal gaming state, the stop display is displayed. At this time, the display of some symbols may overlap with a part of each display, which may cause a problem that the visibility of the stop display symbol is lowered. The display of the decorative design P801 is made small and simplified so that Further, as an example of simplifying and displaying the decorative symbol P801, it is possible to adopt a method of reducing the size and not displaying a character image or the like attached to a number indicating the symbol.

<< Hold display area (specific game state) >>
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in the lower left of the screen of FIG. 20, as the display of the hold object P811 in the hold display area P810 of the specific game state, from the front side of the screen toward the depth direction, from "ho 1" to "ho 1". A display area for the reserved object of "Holding 4" is provided. The display of the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is omitted in the effect mode state of "RUSH_MODE".

When the variation display shown in FIG. 20 ends and a new variation starts in the state, the display of the reserved object P811 located at the bottom of FIG. 20 disappears, and the display of the reserved object P811 lined up in the back moves to the front. The display is controlled so that the display becomes large.

In addition, although not shown, the "result display effect", which is an important effect as an effect displayed during a specific game, will be described.

<< Result display production >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of the "result display effect", the game is mainly performed when the final change in the specific game state (high base state) is executed, or when the hold generated during the specific game state disappears. It is a production performed at the timing when a person recognizes that the "renso" state has ended, and information on how many big hit games have been won in the so-called "renso" state and how many game balls in total. It is a production that notifies the player whether or not the player has won (corresponding to the display of the number of acquired balls).

[This Example]
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration based on the above-mentioned prerequisite technology. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite technology will be mainly described, and the common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the prerequisite technique will be described with the same reference numerals.

[Machine configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment]
The mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 26. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the appearance of the front view of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. 22 to 26 are views showing the mechanical configuration of the center decoration unit P6 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment (particularly, the superior object P650, the horizontal accessory P670, and the lower accessory P680 as the directing accessory P560). Is.

FIG. 21 shows the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment as viewed from the player side. The differences between the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment and the presupposed pachinko gaming machine are the arrangement configuration of various winning devices such as the first starting winning device P710 and the large winning opening P750 in the gaming board P5, and the center decoration unit P6. It is the configuration of the production accessory P560 provided in the above, and various configurations of the other gaming machines are the same as those of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine.

Hereinafter, the arrangement configuration of various winning devices in the gaming area P501 of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described.

(Composition of the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 21, the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment has a center decoration unit P6 arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and the left side area P501L (left-handed area) and the right side of the center decoration unit P6. It is divided into a region P501R (right-handed region).

The left side region P501L is a gaming region in which the gaming ball easily flows down when the firing intensity of the gaming ball is relatively weak, and as shown in FIG. 21, the first start winning unit P710 (first start) is located below the center of the gaming region. The winning openings P711) are arranged, and three general winning openings P730 are arranged as the left general winning unit P730L on the lower left side of the game area.

The right side area P501R is a game area in which the game ball easily flows down when the firing strength of the game ball is relatively strong, and the second start winning unit P720A related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 is located at the lower right of the center decoration unit P6. The second starting winning opening P721A) and the large winning opening unit P750 are provided at the lower right position of the game area P501R. The large winning opening P750 unit is provided with a large winning opening P751 and an operating opening P741.

In the right side region P501R, a second starting winning unit P720B (second starting winning opening P721B) without a normal electric accessory P770 is further provided on the left side of the large winning opening unit P750.

Here, the first start winning opening P711 in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment is a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol (may be referred to as "special drawing 1"), and is a starting winning opening P721A. The second starting winning opening P721B is a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol (sometimes referred to as "special drawing 2").

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, in the normal gaming state and the normal game (low probability / low base), the player fires a game ball toward the left side region P501L (left-handed region) (left-handed). , The basic gameplay is to aim to acquire the right to shift to a special game state (big hit, small hit) by putting a game ball into the first start winning opening P711 and receiving a lottery related to the first special symbol. Designed as.

On the other hand, in the normal game state and the specific game (at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is operating) or the special game state (during the big hit game and the small hit game), the player is in the right area P501R (during the big hit game and the small hit game). Special by launching a game ball toward (right-handed area) (right-handed), inserting the game ball into the second start winning opening P721A or the second starting winning opening P721B, and receiving a lottery related to the second special symbol. Aiming to acquire the right to shift to the game state (big hit, small hit), during the big hit game or small hit game, it is possible to aim to get a large amount of prize balls by entering the game ball into the big prize opening P751. Designed for basic playability.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is configured to have the arrangement configuration and basic game playability of various winning devices in the above-mentioned gaming area P501, but it does not affect the effects and game control described later. Alternatively, it can be changed as appropriate when the relevance is low.

(Structure of the center decoration unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 26, the director P560 (also referred to as “directed movable accessory” or “movable accessory”) provided in the center decoration unit P6 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment. Give an explanation.

As shown in FIG. 22, the effect P560 of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is a representative effect P560 that can advance to the front of the effect display device P80 (effect display device P80). It is provided with three movable accessories (exposed, concealed, etc.) so as to reduce the visibility of at least a part of the display area of the above. Although not illustrated and described in detail in this embodiment, the visibility of the display area of the effect display device P80 is not affected so as not to advance to the front of the display area of the effect display device P80. It is composed of an effect device that operates with almost no change in position, and an effect operation means P81 (effect button P381, lever P382) as a frame movable object P360 provided in the game machine frame (glass frame P3) shown in FIG. 27. The production operation unit P380) is also included in the "production accessory P560 (production movable accessory)".

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, as the effecting object P560, the superior object P650 is arranged in the upper region of the effect display device P80, and the horizontal character P670L and the horizontal character P670R are arranged on the left and right sides of the effect display device P80. Is arranged, and the lower accessory P680 is arranged below the effect display device P80.

《Superior》
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is provided with a superior object P650 on the upper part of the center decoration unit P6, and in a normal standby state, as shown in FIG. 22, it is retracted to the upper side of the display area of the effect display device P80. In the case of performing the effect operation, as shown in FIGS. 23 and 26, the user advances to the front of the display area of the effect display device P80.

In the superior object P650, the elevating belt P654 (not shown) is rotated by the operation of the elevating motor P653 (not shown) from the initial state shown in FIG. 22 (detection state of the elevating initial position sensor P657 (not shown)). The central decorative portion P651 and the rotary decorative portion P652 perform a descending operation according to an elevating guide (not shown) until the indicated state is reached (until the detection state of the elevating effect position sensor P658 (not shown)).

Further, the superior object P650 is in a state of being lowered to the position of FIG. 26, and the rotary decoration portion P652 is expanded by the action of the rotary motor P659 (not shown) until the effect state shown in FIG. 23 is reached, and the rotary decoration is performed from that state. The decorative part imitating the five petals, which is the part P652, rotates clockwise. The operating position of the rotation decoration unit P652 is controlled by a rotation position sensor P660 (rotational initial position sensor) (not shown), and in order to bring the rotation decoration unit P652 into a non-deployed state, it is constant after the detection of the rotation position sensor P660. By rotating the rotating decorative portion P652 counterclockwise from a state in which the rotating decorative portion P652 is rotated by an amount or more, the rotating decorative portion P652 is housed and becomes a non-deployed state.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the superior object P650 is used during a directing operation (for example, when notifying the development of SP reach or a specific high expectation reach), which suggests that the expectation of a big hit is increased. The content of the effect operation is set so as to deterministically notify that it is a big hit in the effect of notifying the end of the reach effect (sometimes referred to as "winning branch effect"). Therefore, the frequency of the effect movement is set to be relatively low compared to the other production accessory P560, and the operation of the superior object P650 reminds the player of a high expectation, or the player's movement. It is a movement that has the meaning of congratulating the acquisition of a big hit, "texture movement" (texture production). In this way, the superior character P650 plays a major role in notifying the effect of raising expectations and the hit itself with respect to the event of the highest interest of the player, such as the game result (whether or not), and thus is the "main production character" ( Alternatively, it may be referred to as a "main production role", a "texture role"), or the like.

In the operating state of FIG. 23, the superior object P650 is operating at the same time as the horizontal accessory P670 described later, and both the superior object P650 and the lateral accessory P670 are configured so as not to interfere with each other. .. On the other hand, if the upper accessory P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 operate at the same time as the lower accessory P680, they may come into contact with each other (interfere with each other) and do not move to the effect position at the same time. ing.

Further, the superior object P650 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment is located at the position shown in FIG. 26 in addition to the first effect operation pattern (strong pattern) which is an effect operation pattern accompanied by the expansion of the rotation decoration portion P652 described above. It is possible to execute a second effect operation pattern (weak pattern), which ends at the stage of moving or moves slightly up and down in the vicinity of the position shown in FIG. 26 and ends with an operation in which the rotation decoration unit P652 is not expanded. At this time, the first effect operation pattern (strong pattern) operates to suggest the development of a specific reach or to notify the final effect result (or the result of the winning / failing lottery) such as the reach. , The second production operation pattern (weak pattern) is used to suggest the development to a production with a low expectation even in a specific reach or SP reach, and is used in a special situation (“B reach” described later). (Lever chance) ”), the second effect operation pattern is not used when notifying the effect result (note that the probability is lower than when the first effect operation pattern is executed, but the second effect pattern). Even when the effect operation pattern is executed, there is a possibility that it will develop into a reach effect with a high degree of expectation as it develops in the first effect operation pattern).

When the superior object P650 operates, as shown in FIG. 26, the superior object operation effect P870 can be displayed in the display area located around the superior object P650 of the effect display device P80. In particular, as shown in FIG. 23, the first effect operation pattern (strong pattern) is configured so that the accessory full-screen effect P873 is displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device P80 when operating. ..

The superior object motion effect P870 and the accessory full-screen effect P873 have a plurality of display modes (for example, white, green, red, gold, etc.) according to the jackpot expectation of the variable display of the special symbol accompanied by the motion of the superior object P650. When the giraffe pattern (maker pattern), rainbow color) can be displayed and the effect operation of the superior object P650 executes the first effect operation pattern, the character full screen effect P873 is red or more (red, It is displayed in a display mode (gold, giraffe pattern, rainbow color).

Further, the superior object motion effect P870 and the accessory full-screen effect P873 are displayed with priority over the advance notice effect, reach effect, and decorative pattern P801 (displayed in the upper display layer), while the simple drawing P802. The display priority is set so that the display of information indicating the game status such as the right-handed small display (P832), the left-handed small display (P834)), and the simple hold display P814 can be visually recognized. It is set.

《Horizontal character》
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is provided with horizontal characters P670 on the left and right sides of the center decoration unit P6. In the state in which the horizontal accessory P670 is normally on standby (non-execution state of the effect), as shown in FIGS. 22 (and 24), the horizontal upper decorative portion P671L, R, the horizontal center decorative portion P672L, R, and the horizontal lower The decorative portions P673L and R are in a state of waiting by expanding in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIG. 24, the horizontal accessory P670 has the horizontal upper decorative portions P671L, R, the horizontal center decorative portions P672L, R, and the horizontal lower decorative portions P673L, R from both side portions of the center decoration unit P6. It is configured to advance while keeping the relative positional relationship in the vertical direction close to each other.

The horizontal accessory P670L arranged on the left side and the horizontal accessory P670R arranged on the right side are each driven by a stepping motor (drive motor P674) (not shown) which is an individual drive source, and the drive motor P674 on the left side. When is driven, the horizontal upper decorative portion P671L and the horizontal center decorative portion P672L are directed toward the center of the display area of the effect display device P80 by the action of a drive transmission mechanism (for example, a rack & pinion mechanism or a link mechanism) (not shown). , The horizontal lower decorative portion P673L is configured to operate (the explanation is omitted, but the same applies to the horizontal accessory P670R arranged on the right side).

The operating positions of the horizontal accessory P670L and the horizontal accessory P670R detect the storage position sensors P675L and R for detecting the initial position provided corresponding to each, and the effect operation position provided corresponding to each. It is detected by the shielding position sensors P676L and R for the purpose of.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the horizontal character P670 has a pre-reach advance notice effect, a look-ahead effect, a post-reach advance notice during the reach effect, and a decorative pattern (special design) at the start of fluctuation or before the reach effect develops. (Including) is configured to be able to perform motion effects at any timing, such as the liveliness before and after the temporary stop, and the timing when the chance eye is finally stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect. Among the three effecting objects P560 represented by the machine P, the effecting object P560 having the highest operation frequency.

Such an operation of the horizontal character P670 may be basically incorporated into the production as a part of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice, post-reach advance notice), or it may be combined with the advance notice effect as a look-ahead effect independent of the advance notice effect. The purpose is to create an effect that raises the expectation that the advance notice production will lead to a suitable ending for the player and that the subsequent production content will be changed to a production content with high expectation for big hits. It is set.

As described above, the purpose of the horizontal accessory P670 is to directly notify the big hit only by the operation of the horizontal accessory P670 and to suggest that the expectation of the big hit is very high, like the above-mentioned superior object P650. It is not set, and the purpose is to create a lively effect to enhance the gorgeousness and appearance of the entire production by combining it with other production devices such as the production display device P80, other production accessories P560, and speakers P83. It is a secondary production that is used as a speaker. Therefore, the horizontal character P670 may be referred to as a "sub-directing character" (or "sub-directing character", "lively character", etc.).

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a state when the horizontal accessory P670 is performing an effect operation. In FIG. 24, the horizontal upper decorative portion P671L, R, the horizontal center decorative portion P672L, R, and the horizontal lower decorative portion P673L, R of the horizontal accessory P670 are in a state of shielding the display area of the effect display device P80. Whether or not the special design P804 (a symbol described as "NEXT" and a "pseudo-ream" effect is performed when the stop is displayed), which is a decorative symbol for a special effect, is temporarily stopped during the execution of the normal reach. It is a situation that is inciting the player.

In FIG. 24, the left decorative symbol P801L and the right decorative symbol P801R that are already in the stop display state (or the temporary stop display state) are displayed smaller than the middle decorative symbol P801C that is about to be stopped and displayed as a special design. It is highlighted by the operation of the horizontal effect object P670 and the horizontal character motion effect P871 whether or not the special design is stopped as the intermediate decorative symbol P801C (already displayed as the first and second stop symbols). The left and right decorative symbols P801L and R are displayed small in a position that avoids interference with the horizontal accessory P670 in order to recognize the tempai symbol or not to reduce the visibility. If it is not the purpose, the left and right decorative patterns P801L and R may be hidden).

In the example of FIG. 24, the display area of the effect display device P80 (the display area not hidden behind the horizontal character P670), which is easy to see when the horizontal character P670 is moved to the shielding position, is not yet displayed. The special design P804 is displayed larger than the normal decorative symbol P801 in the stop decorative symbol row (decorative symbol row that is not in the temporary stop display mode), and has already been displayed in the other stop display mode (temporary stop display mode). The decorative symbol P801 of the decorative symbol row (left column, right column) of is displayed small. By displaying in this way, the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol configured as the final stop symbol row is attracted by the player by limiting the area that can be visually recognized by the shielding of the horizontal accessory P670. Can be done.

In such a situation that at least a part of the display area of the effect display device P80 is shielded by the operation of the effect object P560, the timing for drawing attention to the display of the decorative symbol, which is the next stop display mode, is pseudo. It can be applied not only to continuous production but also to reach production. Further, not only in the final stop symbol row, but also at least a part of the display area of the effect display device P80 by the operation of the effect accessory P560 at the time of the stop display of the second stop symbol row that switches to the second stop display mode. It can also be used to shield and draw attention to whether it forms a reach mode with a symbol sequence that has already been stopped and displayed.

Further, the horizontal object motion effect P871 has a plurality of effect patterns (for example, when the display color is white, blue, green, or red, or the display size is small, medium, or large) as in the superior object motion effect P870. In some cases, the operation animation of the effect is different, etc.), and the possibility (expectation degree) of producing an effect advantageous to the player differs depending on the display mode. For example, in the example of FIG. 24, when the horizontal object motion effect P871 is white, the special design P804 (“NEXT” symbol) is not stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol P801C, and a symbol such as “4” is displayed as it is. There is a high possibility that an outlier mode such as "343" will be notified, and when the horizontal object motion effect P871 is red, the special equipment drawing P804 is always stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-rearrangement (pseudo-variation) is performed again. An example is given.

As mentioned earlier, the horizontal accessory P670 starts the operation at the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation as a warning effect before the reach, or operates at the timing of the end of the fluctuation such as the stop of the chance eye such as the end of the fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 24, since it is a production accessory P560 that includes and operates relatively frequently, it is configured so that there is no or less interference with the simple mounting drawing P802 and the simple hold display P814 during the production operation. (That is, the display position of the display indicating the game state such as the simple loading P804 and the simple hold display P814 or the not shown separate notification P830 is determined based on the operating range of the horizontal accessory P670). The display position of the simple loading drawing P802 and the simple hold display P814 may be determined by including the operating range of other accessories such as the upper accessory P650 and the lower accessory P680 described later. In the pachinko gaming machine P, the display position is determined based on the horizontal accessory P670, which is an easy-to-operate effect accessory P560 immediately after the start of the fluctuation and immediately before the stop of the fluctuation. If the lower accessory P680 is easy to operate at the timing before and after the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop like the horizontal accessory P670, the simplified drawing P804 or the simple drawing P804 based on the operating range of the horizontal accessory P670 and the lower accessory P680. It is preferable to determine the display position of the simple hold display P814 (the textured accessory is basically configured to return to the initial position by the end of the fluctuation under any situation if there is no abnormality or the like. Therefore, do not consider it).

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, the accessory motion effect such as the horizontal accessory motion effect P871 is displayed (displayed in the upper display layer) in preference to the display of the decorative symbol P801 or the like or the advance notice effect. , The display priority is lower than the operation promotion image (button image P881 etc.) that prompts the operation of the effect operation means P81 such as the effect button P381 displayed to instruct the player of the effect content, and the above simple drawing Rather than the display for making the player recognize the state of the game even in the situation where the effecting object P560 is operating, such as display information indicating the game state such as P804, the simple hold display P814, or the not shown separate notification P830. The display priority is set low.

《Subordinates》
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is provided with a lower part P680 at the lower part of the center decoration unit P6. In the normal standby state (non-execution state of the effect), the lower accessory P680 is in a state of evacuating from the display area of the effect display device P80 and waiting as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the lower accessory P680 is executing the effect operation, as shown in FIG. 25, the lower accessory P680 rises to a position where the visibility of the lower region of the display area of the effect display device P80 is reduced, and the lower accessory P680 The central decorative portion P681 and the pinnate decorative portion P682 are in an easily visible state.

The operation of the lower object P680 is driven by a drive motor P684 (not shown), and when the drive motor P684 rotates, a rack & pinion mechanism (not shown) is activated, and the central decorative portion P681 rises to the lower position sensor P686 (initial position). It is possible to move up and down within the detection range (effect operation range) of the position sensor P687 (effect position). In the feather-shaped decorative portion P682 of the lower accessory P680, the connecting gear (not shown) rotates in conjunction with the elevating operation of the central decorative portion P681, and the central decorative portion P681 is moved in accordance with the operation of raising the central decorative portion P681. It switches from a state of downward inclination toward the outside as a center to an upwardly inclined state (state shown in FIG. 25).

The operation range in the effect operation of the lower accessory P680 overlaps with the respective effect range of the upper accessory P650 and the horizontal accessory P670, and either the superior object P650 or the horizontal accessory P670 operates at the same time. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, only the one in which the effect operation of the lower character P680 is performed independently is prepared because there is a possibility of interfering with each other. It should be noted that the effectants P560 can operate at the same time as the upper accessory P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 in FIG. 23 as long as they do not interfere with each other within the operating range. However, the more the effect P560 that operates at the same time, the more power is devoted to the operation of the effect P560, and other effect devices and control devices such as the effect control CPU of the effect control board P41, the effect lamp P82, and the speaker P83. In some cases, an electrical limit may be provided to limit the combination of the effectors P560 that can be driven at the same time (the total current value when a plurality of effectors P560 are driven). be.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 25, an example of the effect operation of the lower accessory P680 will be described. The lower character P680 is a "sub-directing character" similar to the horizontal character P670 described above, and is set to have a relatively higher production execution frequency than the superior character P650, which is the "main production character". It is a directing character P560.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the subordinate object P680 is related to the content of the advance notice effect, such as when a character appears in the advance notice effect (see FIG. 25) or immediately after the start of re-variation of the decorative symbol P801 in the pseudo-continuous effect. The effect operation for the purpose of executing a certain effect is mainly set, and the effect display device P80 like the look-ahead effect performed in combination with the display content of the effect display device P80 like the horizontal character P670. The effect operation is set so that it is rarely used as an effect suggesting a content different from the displayed content (note that the effect operation pattern used as the look-ahead effect may also be set for the lower character P680). Since the lower character P680 set in this way is a production character that has more production operation contents in a situation where there is an effect that leads to the subsequent effect as the effect content than the horizontal character P670, the horizontal character P670 operates. It is a directing role that makes it easier for the player to get a sense of expectation about winning a big hit than if he did.

In the effect example of FIG. 25, as a post-reach advance notice effect (notice during reach effect), a character cut-in (an effect in which a band-shaped character image is superimposed and displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device P80) and a subordinate object are used. An example of the effect in which P680 is operating is shown. As shown in FIG. 25, the subordinate movement effect P872 is displayed (displayed in the upper display layer) with priority over the character cut-in notice displayed over the background reach effect as a post-reach advance notice effect. It has become. At this time, the subordinate movement effect P872 includes a plurality of effect patterns (for example, patterns in which the display colors are blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors), which are displayed at different frequencies depending on the expected degree of jackpot of the fluctuation during execution. It is configured to have a pattern in which the display size is small, medium, or large, a pattern in which the movement of the display animation is different, and the like). Further, at this time, the character of the character cut-in displayed as the subordinate movement effect P872 is associated with each other to some extent, and the character A of the first composition and the blue effect, and the character A or B of the second composition and the green effect. , The combination is defined such as the red effect of the character A or the character C in the third composition.

While the lower character P680 and the horizontal character P670 play a role as a secondary effect, the horizontal character P670 is directly related to the effect content of the advance notice effect displayed on the effect display device P80. The lower role P680 is mainly used for the action of the effect related to the advance notice effect, while it is also used for the execution of the effect of the effect (pre-reading of the effect of the effect) as a low look-ahead effect and is widely and frequently used. Although it is used as an effect operation less frequently than the horizontal character P670 (the execution frequency of the effect operation is low), it directly suggests the result (expectation degree) of the variation display of the special symbol being executed. It is a production role that is easy to get involved with.

(Movable frame: Operation explanation of the production operation unit)
FIG. 27 is an operation explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit P380, which is one of the frame movable objects provided in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment.

FIG. 27 (a) shows a state (initial state) of the initial position in which the effect operation unit P380 is not performing the effect operation, and FIG. 27 (b) is an effect state after the effect operation unit P380 performs the effect operation. Is shown. In the effect operation unit P380, the effect button P381 and the lever P382 are integrally configured. In the initial state, the lever P382 cannot be operated, and in the effect state, the lever P382 can be operated. It has become.

More specifically, in the effect operation unit P380, the effect button P381 and the lever P382 are rotated by the operation of the lever elevating motor P389 to rotate the effect button P381 and the cylindrical groove cam (not shown) connected to the indicator shaft of the lever P382. Ascends from the detection position of the lever initial position sensor P386 shown in FIG. 27 (a) to the position detected by the lever ascending position sensor P387 shown in FIG. 27 (b). When the effect operation unit P380 moves to the position of the lever raising position sensor P387, the lever input sensor P388 can detect the input operation of the lever P382 by the tilting operation of the lever P382 of the player.

(Other examples of character movement effects)
As described above, the upper character movement effect P870, the horizontal character movement effect P871, the lower character movement effect P872, and the lower character full screen effect according to the movements of the upper character P650, the horizontal character P670, and the lower character P680. It has been explained that an effect image such as P873 (an effect that displays a uniform effect image (rainbow effect or the like) in the entire display area of the effect display device P80 at the time of the effect of FIG. 23) is displayed.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, there are other effects displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 (referred to as "effect interlocking display effect") with respect to the operation of the effect character P560. .. The following is an example of another effect-linked display effect.

<< Pseudo-role motion image >>
The "pseudo character motion image" enhances the character movable effect of the effect character P560 by operating an image imitating the actual effect character P560 (or a similar image with some design changes). It is a display effect that makes it possible to execute an effect that is displayed in place of the actual movable character effect.

For example, a pseudo character motion image similar to that of the effector P560 is linked to the operation of the effector P560, and the pseudo character is forward or backward in the movement direction of the effector P560 within the operation range of the effector P560. By displaying the motion image, the player may be made to recognize it as an afterimage or blur, and an impression may be made by giving an illusion of the motion speed of the effecting object P560.

Further, when the pseudo character operation image is in a situation where the effect character P560 cannot be operated (for example, the effect character P560 cannot be restored due to step-out or the like, and the operation is prohibited, which is a character error state. Etc.), even in a situation where the actual production accessory P560 cannot perform a movable production by displaying a pseudo character movement image at the timing when the production character P560 operates, the production including the operation of the production character P560 is performed. It can be made to recognize that it was an aspect.

Since the "pseudo accessory motion image" is an image having an effect of substituting the effect accessory P560 located in front of the effect display device P80 and enhancing the effect, the above-mentioned superior character operation effect P870 and the horizontal character operation The image has a higher display priority than the effect images such as the effect P871, the lower character operation effect P872, and the character full screen effect P873. Has a low display priority).

Further, the "pseudo character motion image" is an image (or similar image) imitating the effect character P560, but the display color and the like do not need to be configured with the same color as the design of the actual effect character P560. , The image may be changed in appearance due to a display effect such as gray scale or sepia.

《Character movement fanning effect》

The "feature motion fanning effect" is one of the staging bonus motion interlocking display effects, and includes the staging timing at which the staging bonus P560 is performed (including the case of a gasse pattern in which the staging bonus P560 is not actually performed). ), The effect image is displayed in the vicinity of the effecting object P560, or the pseudo accessory operation image is displayed in the vicinity within the operating range of the effecting object P560. It is a production that suggests to the player that the movement may be performed.

The "feature motion fanning effect" is an effect suggesting that the motion of the effect accessory P560, which leads to the degree of expectation of acquisition of the special game, is performed, and has a plurality of display patterns as the display pattern. As a display pattern, the display color may be white, red, or gold, or the display size may be switched between small, medium, and large, so that the operation of the effect P560 may be executed. Suggest (expectation) to the player.

(Direction movable accessory_initialization / return operation processing)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, the “directed movable accessory_initialization / return operation process” of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process includes the "initial position return operation process" for returning the position of the effect accessory P560 to the initial position, and the effect accessory P560. It is composed of a process including two processes of "initial operation confirmation process" for confirming whether or not can operate normally (see FIG. 28).

In the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process, there is an operation abnormality (an event such as an error that is judged to be necessary to confirm the operation) in the effect object P560 or when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. This is the process that is executed when Judgment of operation abnormality is based on the result of the input port monitoring process (step 4008), which is the process of the effect control board (effect control CPU), in the effect control process (step 4012), the effect movable accessory_initialization. The flag for the request for the return operation process (operation instruction, operation control) is established, and the effect device control process (step 4010) executes the request for the initialization / return operation to the effector P560.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, there are the following four situations in which a request for the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process is made. In addition, the process executed in the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process under each situation is also described.
1. 1. Initialization operation when the power is turned on Both requests for "initial position return operation processing" and "initial operation confirmation processing" are executed.
2. 2. When an over-number of steps error occurs, both the "initial position return operation processing" and "initial operation confirmation processing" requests are executed.
3. 3. When a position check error occurs, only the request for "initial position return operation processing" is executed.
4. When a time monitoring check error occurs, only the request for "initial position return operation processing" is executed.

Here, the "step number over error" drives the number of steps that becomes a determination threshold after the operation request is executed by design when an operation request (effect operation or initial position return operation) is made to the effect object P560. It is an error that occurs when the sensor to be detected is not inspected even if it is output to the motor, and the "position check error" is produced at a predetermined game timing such as when the change starts (or ends) or when the game state changes. As a result of determining whether or not the accessory P560 is in the position where it should exist (initial position sensor of the effect accessory P560, effect position sensor), the effect accessory P560 is not in the expected position (the sensor to be detected is detected). This is an error that occurs when (not done), and the "time monitoring check error" is an error that can occur as a result of determining the same determination as the "position check error" at regular time intervals (for example, 5 seconds).

The "time monitoring check error" is excluded from the error monitoring target for the "position check error" and the effecting effect P560 that is executing the effecting operation assigned by the variable effect or the look-ahead effect.

Further, the request for the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process is when the special symbol is variablely displayed (for example, when the effect P560 is operated as a variable effect). Is also feasible. Then, when a request for the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process is made, the change is performed according to the change display of the special symbol until the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process is completed. The operation of the effect character P560 (at least the effect effect movable object_initialization / return operation process target) based on the effect execution pattern is prohibited.

<< Directional movable accessory_Initialization / return operation processing >>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a processing flow of “effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation processing” (step 5800). The "effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process" is a process performed in the effect device control process (step 4010) of the effect control board (effect control CPU). Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

First, the "effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process" determines whether or not the request related to the initialization / return operation of the effect accessory P560 is executed (step 5802). If the initialization / return operation is not requested for the effecting object P560 (step 5802NO), the processing is terminated without performing the subsequent processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a request for the initialization / return operation for the effecting object P560 (step 5802YES), the process proceeds to the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804), which is the submodule process.

The details of the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. When the "initial position return operation process" is completed, it is subsequently determined whether or not the current situation is in a game stop state such as when the setting is being changed (or the setting is being confirmed) (step 5806). When the game is stopped, such as when the setting is being changed (setting is being confirmed), the effect control board (effect control CPU) waits for the "initial operation confirmation process" without the determination result being NO until the game stop state is released. It becomes a situation to do.

The reason for waiting for the "initial operation confirmation process" (step 5810) after the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804) when the game is stopped, such as during setting confirmation (setting change), is when the power is turned on. In a game stop state such as when the setting to be transferred is being changed (setting is being confirmed), a security notification indicating that the current setting status or setting change has been made to the effect display device P80, and other settings for the gaming machine are to be performed. The administrator menu screen and the like can be displayed, and the effect P560, which was located in front of the display area of the effect display device P80 before the power failure, is displayed in the display area by the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804). This is because the situation is considered to be optimal because it is after the evacuation from the front and the visibility of the display area of the effect display device P80 is not hindered by an abnormality in the operation of the accessory such as step-out during the “initial operation confirmation process”.

If it is determined that the setting is not being confirmed (setting is being changed), etc. (step 5806NO) in the "directing movable accessory_initialization / return operation processing", then it is when the power is turned on or the number of steps is exceeded. It is determined whether or not there is (step 5808). As described above, the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment has a specification of making a request for "initial operation confirmation processing" when the power is turned on and when an error over the number of steps occurs. Because. In other words, if the request is based on a position check error or a time monitoring check error, there is no need to execute the "initial operation confirmation process", so the effect control board (effect control CPU) is a submodule process "initial operation". The transition to "confirmation process" (step 5810) is not performed.

The details of the "initial operation confirmation process" will be described later. When the "initial operation confirmation process" is completed, the information of the request related to the execution of the initialization / return operation is cleared, and the "effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process" is completed.

<< Initial position return operation processing >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the “initial position return operation process” (step 5804) related to the operation control of the effect object P560 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment will be described. It is determined that the "initial position return operation process" does not exist in the initial position (the effect position sensor or the intermediate position sensor may be the "initial position" instead of the initial position sensor depending on the effect situation). Is a process for returning to the initial position.

In the "initial position return operation process", first, a request (operation instruction, operation control) for stopping the operation is output to all the effectors P560 (step 5820). This process stops the operation of the other production accessory P560 that is in operation when an error occurs due to a request for the production operation that was output before the power failure, a position check error, or a time monitoring check error. This is a process for the purpose of preventing interference with other production accessories when returning the production accessory P560 to the initial position.

When the stop request for the operation of all the effecting objects P560 is completed, the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment is subsequently instructed to move the lower accessory P680 to the initial position (detection position of the descending position sensor P686). I do. If the lower accessory P680 is already located at the initial position (when the lowering position sensor P686 has been detected), the process is omitted.

When the lower accessory P680 moves to the initial position (or the initial position return operation is omitted), then the upper accessory P650 shifts to the initial position return operation. In the initial position return operation of the superior object P650, first, it is confirmed on the superior object P650 whether the elevating initial position sensor P657 and the rotation position sensor P660 of the sensor related to the initial position are in the detection state (step P5824). As described above, the superior object P650 is configured to switch between the deployed state and the retracted state depending on the rotation direction at the timing when the rotation decoration unit P652 detects the rotation position sensor, and the rotation position. Even if the sensor P660 is in the detection state, the rotation decoration portion P652 may be deployed, so that it cannot be immediately moved to the detection position of the ascending / descending initial position sensor P657. Therefore, when returning the superior object P650 that does not exist in the initial position to the initial position, the rotary decoration unit P652 is expanded while being moved to the effect position once, and after surely changing to the stored state, the ascending / descending initial position is reached. It is necessary to have the sensor P657 detect it.

When it is determined that the superior object P650 does not exist at the initial position (step 5824NO), the superior object P650 is moved until the elevating effect position sensor P658 is in the detection state (step 5826). If the superior object P650 is already at the position of the elevating effect position sensor P658, the process is omitted.

In the initial position return operation of the superior object P650, when the superior object P658 moves to the position (effect position) where the elevating initial position sensor P658 is detected, the rotary motor P659 is subsequently moved in the direction in which the rotary decoration portion P652 is in the deployed state. Drive (step 5828). In addition to the next detection of the rotation position sensor P660, the rotation amount is rotated to a position where the rotation decoration body P652 is stored at the detection position of the rotation position sensor P660 by the return operation (reverse rotation of the rotation motor P659).

When the superior object P650 changes to the expanded state at the effect position, the "initial position return operation process" subsequently instructs the superior object P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 to perform the initial position return operation at the same time (step). 5830). In other words, the process of moving the rotary decorative portion P652 of the superior object P650 to the position detected by the elevating initial position sensor P657 and moving the horizontal object P670 to the position detected by the storage position sensor P675 after the rotating decorative portion P652 is stored. (The processing is omitted in the case of the initial position detected by the storage position sensor P675 for the horizontal accessory P670). Only the process of step 5830 is specified to execute the operation for a plurality of effectors P560 at the same time, but the superior object P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 have an operation pattern for returning to the state of FIG. It is a combination of the operations of the production accessory P560, which has no problem in terms of electrical limitation (limitation of the total current value) even if it operates at the same time in the production.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, the lower accessory P680, the upper accessory P650, and the horizontal accessory P670 are sequentially performed in the "initial position return operation process". The processing order of the "initial position return operation process" is configured to determine whether or not the plurality of effectors P560 should be executed in a predetermined order, and perform an operation of returning to the initial position. When the operations are performed in order, the electric power for the operation is not supplied to the effecting objects that are not the operation targets. The initial position return operation process configured in this way prevents interference during the return operation by not starting the return operation of the initial position at the same time for all the effectors P560, and by driving them at the same time. It is possible to prevent the use of a large amount of electric power from adversely affecting the operation of the effect control board and other effect devices. Further, as in step 5830, the effector P560 that does not interfere with each other and that does not hinder the electrical limitation even if driven at the same time can be instructed to return to the initial position at the same time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the initial position return operation of the entire effecting object P560 from becoming excessively long.

<< Initial operation check processing >>
Subsequently, detailed processing will be described for the “initial operation confirmation processing” (step 5810). The "initial operation confirmation process" is a process of confirming whether or not the effect operation can be executed in order for all the effect characters P560 provided in the gaming machine (for example, all the effect characters P560 are initially positioned. It is a process to confirm that it can be operated normally by operating from to the effect position).

When the "initial operation confirmation process" is started in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the operation confirmation process of the lower character P680 is first performed (step 5850). In the operation confirmation process of the lower accessory P680, the drive motor P683 is operated to operate the lower accessory P650 from the state detected by the lower position sensor P686 to the position detected by the ascending position sensor P687, and then the lower position sensor P686 is operated again. It is configured to perform processing to operate until it is detected in.

When the confirmation operation of the lower accessory P680 is completed, the operation confirmation process of the upper accessory P650 is subsequently executed. In the operation confirmation process of the superior object P650, the elevating motor P653 is operated to move the central decorative portion P681 of the superior object P650 from the detection position of the elevating initial position sensor P657 to the position to be detected by the elevating effect position sensor P658. (Step 5852). Then, when the central decorative portion P681 of the superior object P650 moves to the effect position, the rotary motor P659 is operated to check whether the rotary decorative portion P652 can be deformed to the deployed state, and the rotary position sensor P660 is next. The rotation motor P659 is operated by the additional drive amount that can be stored in the rotation decoration unit P652 during the detection and return operation, and the deformation operation of the rotation decoration unit P652 is confirmed (step 5854).

When the confirmation of the effect operation of the rotary decoration unit P652 at the effect position of the superior object P650 is completed, an instruction is subsequently given to return the superior object P650 to the initial position, and the horizontal accessory P670 is instructed to perform the operation. Give an instruction to perform the operation check process. In the operation confirmation process of the horizontal accessory P670, by operating the drive motor P674, each decorative portion of the horizontal accessory P670 (horizontal upper decorative portion P671, horizontal center decorative portion P672, horizontal lower decorative portion 673) is moved to the production position. Make it work. That is, after operating the drive motor P674 from the state detected by the storage position sensor P675 to the state where the shield position sensor P676 is detected, the drive motor P674 is operated in the reverse direction until the state is detected by the storage position sensor P675 again. It is configured to let you.

In the "initial operation confirmation process", the superior object P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 have a period in which the operation is executed at the same time, but each operation is performed at a timing different from that when the effect operation is actually performed (see FIG. 23). It is configured as follows. More specifically, when the superior object P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 are operated as the effect operation, the overlap period of the operation output for simultaneously outputting the operation is the operation output when the operation output is simultaneously performed in the initial operation confirmation process. It is configured to be longer than the overlapping period, and in the case of the initial operation, by reducing the period of simultaneous operation as much as possible, the period in which each operation of each production accessory P560 is performed becomes longer. It is configured so that the confirmer can accurately and easily visually recognize the operation of the effecting object P560.

(Correspondence at the time of operation error of the production character)
In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, when a malfunction occurs in the production accessory P560 (for example, when the above-mentioned step number over error or position check error occurs), the production movable accessory_initialization / The return operation process is executed, but even if the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process is executed, the situation in which the effect operation can be executed cannot be secured for the effect object P560 (for example, the initial position). Even if the return operation process and the initial operation check process are repeatedly executed three times, the process does not return to the initial position or cannot be moved to the effect position.) It is configured to prohibit the operation of the accessory P560 and the effect P560 that may interfere with the corresponding effect P560.

Even when the movable effect operation of the effect P560 based on the occurrence of such an error is prohibited, the light emitting portion of the effect P560 is configured to execute the light emission effect. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, since the light emitting pattern for lighting the light emitting portion of the effecting object P560 is not set exclusively when the operation is prohibited, it is the same as when the normal movable effect operation is executed. Lighting is controlled to.

(Gameability of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment)
Next, the playability of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a transition and an effect state between a normal game and a specific game in a normal game state. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the types of jackpots in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table normally used in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment employs parallel control, and is a gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be independently varied and displayed.

It should be noted that the playability described below is the playability when the player normally plays the game, and the description is omitted for irregular situations.

<< Normal game (low probability / low base) >>
First, the playability of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, when the player first starts the game, the game is played in the normal game (low probability / low base) shown on the left side of FIG. 31.

In a normal game (low probability / low base), the player shoots a game ball toward the first start winning opening P711 and aims to win a big hit by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol (see FIG. 31 (a)). ). When a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, after the big hit game, the big hit game is executed by the special symbol (big hit symbol) stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device P51 when the big hit is started. Either "short-time game (low probability / high base)" (see FIG. 31 (b)) or "probability variable game (high probability / high base)" (see FIG. 31 (d)) depending on the type of It is distributed to the specific game of.

In normal games, game production is performed based on "normal stage" (normal production mode) such as "A stage" to "C stage" as the type of production state (production mode), and "special stage" in addition. (Special production mode) includes "D stage", "E stage", and "complete notification mode for characters".

The "D stage" is an effect stage (effect mode) dedicated to the look-ahead effect, and when the dedicated look-ahead effect lottery is won, somewhere in the change display before the start of the change display of the hold of the look-ahead target. It is a production stage that shifts at the timing. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, when the stage shifts to the "D stage", the effect content displayed on the effect display device P80 until a predetermined timing during which the hold subject to the look-ahead effect is changing becomes special. In addition to this, the horizontal character P670 is configured to continue swinging in the vicinity of the initial position, and the magnitude of the movement of the horizontal character P670 and the horizontal character movement effect P871 increase the amount of movement as the degree of expectation increases. Is getting bigger and the display pattern is changing to the one with high expectation.

The "E stage" is a case where the pseudo-variation effect (pseudo-ream) is executed, and the re-variation display after the third time (referred to as "pseudo X" depending on the number of re-variations, in this case, "pseudo 3"). It is a special production stage (special production mode) that shifts when becomes. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, when it becomes pseudo 3, it is definite to shift to the high expectation reach (SP reach) in the reach production, and it shifts to any high expectation reach. A special effect for suggesting or displaying is displayed before the start of the reach effect. In this "E stage", when it develops into normal reach, multiple icons suggesting high expectation reach production are displayed, and along with the movement display of the displayed icon image, the superior character P650, the right side character P670R, and the lower character The object P680 and the left side accessory P670L operate in order, and finally one of the effect objects P560 operates to the effect position and the icon image is displayed, which suggests the high expectation reach of the development destination (). In the case of the superior character P650, it will develop into a high expectation reach with the highest expectation, and before the icon image becomes visible, the movable character effect using the rotating decoration part P652 and the character full screen effect P873. Coordinating production).

The "feature complete notification mode" is a special production stage (special) that can be selected by the player by operating the production operation means P81 during non-game (during the game standby demo display) of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. Production mode). When the "complete notification mode for the character" is selected in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the superior character P650 and the horizontal character P670 have moved to the front of the effect display device P80 (the state shown in FIG. 23). ), And a notice effect is executed mainly by the operation of the light emitting unit and the horizontal accessory P670 provided in the superior object P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 (characters in the display area of the partially visible effect display device P80). Display or button image P881 or the like may be displayed). In the "complete notification mode of the character", it is notified that the rotation decoration part P652 of the superior character P650 is finally rotated in the fluctuation that becomes a big hit, and then the superior character P650 is notified. When the horizontal accessory P670 returns to the initial position and the display area of the effect display device P80 becomes visible, an effect of notifying the type of the jackpot game acquired is performed (light emission mode when the rotation decoration unit P652 rotates). The type of jackpot that can be obtained in (may be suggested).

The "D stage", "E stage", and "feature complete notification mode" are examples, and may be executed during a specific game as a modified example. Further, the "complete notification mode for the character" does not have to be the one in which the production character P560 (in the previous example, the superior character P650 and the horizontal character P670) is operating in advance. If P881 is displayed and the effect stage is such that if the effect P560 (superior character P650 and horizontal character P670) operates when the button is pressed, a big hit is made, and the predetermined action of the character is confirmed as a big hit. good.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, in the normal game (low probability / low base), the symbol changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 660 times) after the ram clear or the previous big hit game. However, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "missing", the game shifts to the "support mode" which is a specific game (low probability / high base) without going through the big hit game. "Support mode" is one of the specific games (low probability / high base) described later, and whether the variable display corresponding to 500 special symbol lottery is performed or whether the big hit game is acquired by the special symbol lottery. (The big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices P51 and P52). In addition, "support mode" does not exist when shifting via a big hit.

<< Specific game: Short-time game (low probability / high base) >>
Next, a time-saving game (low probability / high base), which is one of the specific games in the normal game state, will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, there are two types of specific game (low probability / high base) states. One is the "revival chance" and the other is the "support mode" mentioned above. "Resurrection chance" and "support mode" have different entry triggers and termination conditions.

"Resurrection chance" and "support mode" are the rush opportunity and the end condition, "revival chance" shifts after the big hit game (especially after the big hit game of the normal big hit described later), and 100 special symbol lottery is held. Or, it is a specific game state that continues until a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery within 100 times. On the other hand, in the "support mode", as described above, the symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 660 times) after the ram is cleared or after the previous big hit game, and the result of the special symbol lottery is "missing". It is a specific game state that shifts to the case where there is, and continues until 500 special symbol lottery is performed or a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery within 500 times.

In the normal game state of a specific game (low probability / high base), the player launches a game ball into the right game area P501R, passes the game ball through the operating port P741, and makes the second start winning unit P720 a normal electric accessory. P770 is operated to make the opening / closing member P771 of the second start winning unit P720 in an easy-to-win state, a game ball is won in the second start winning opening P721, and a game is played by receiving a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol (this). A game performed by launching a game ball into the right side game area P501R is referred to as a “right-handed game”).

When a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol (see FIG. 31 (c)), the jackpot game is started (the special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device P52). Depending on the type of, the game shifts to the "support mode" again after the big hit game (when the normal big hit, see FIG. 31 (b)), or the "X rush" (high probability / high base) or "X" of the probabilistic game described later. It shifts to "rush SUPER" (high probability / low base) (for probability variation jackpot, see FIG. 31 (d)).

<< Specific game: Probability change game (high probability / high base or high probability / low base) >>
Subsequently, among the specific games of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the game in the normal game state of the probabilistic game will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, there are two types of probabilistic games, "X rush" (high probability / low base) and "X rush SUPER" (high probability / low base).

The probabilistic game "X Rush" and "X Rush SUPER" shift to after a specific jackpot game (after the probabilistic jackpot jackpot game) and continue until the next jackpot game starts. As a modification, if a special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) during "X rush" (high probability / high base), the electric chew support function ends and "X rush SUPER" (high probability). / Low base) may be configured so that it can be migrated.

The game method of "X Rush" and "X Rush SUPER" is performed by a right-handed game similar to the above-mentioned time-saving game. When a jackpot is won in a right-handed game (see FIG. 31 (e)), the jackpot game depends on the type of jackpot symbol (special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device P52) that starts the jackpot game. Later, either shift to "support mode" (normally when a big hit, see Fig. 31 (b)), or again the probabilistic game "X rush" (high probability / high base) or "X rush SUPER" (high probability / low). (Base) (see FIG. 31 (d) at the time of probability variation jackpot).

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set high even when the electric chew support function is not activated (for example, in the low probability state of the normal symbol lottery: 299/300, In the high probability state: 300/300), even in normal games (low probability / low base) and "X rush SUPER" (high probability / low base), the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 provided in the second start winning unit P720 is activated. It is becoming more frequent.

In the state where the electric chew support function is operating, regarding the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770, the opening extension function is activated, and when the right-handed game is performed, the ordinary electric accessory P770 is operating. It is configured to occupy most of the space (for example, after the normal electric accessory P770 is activated for 6 seconds, the ordinary electric accessory P770 is activated again after about 1 second by the next ordinary symbol lottery. ), When playing a right-handed game in a high base state (a state in which the electric chew support function is operating), the game ball is located downstream of the second start winning opening P721 (large winning opening unit P750). It is configured so that it does not flow down too much.

On the other hand, in a situation where the electric chew support function is not operating (normal game or "X rush SUPER"), a prize is won in the second start winning opening P721, and a game is played when the normal electric accessory P770 is not operating. A game ball can flow down toward the large winning opening unit P750 downstream of the second starting winning opening P721, and when a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, a small hit game It is possible to increase the number of game balls based on the winning of the big winning opening P751 in the middle.

In addition, during "X Rush SUPER", since the probability fluctuation and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated, the fluctuation time of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be shortened fluctuation (about 1 to 2 seconds). On the other hand, since the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is not activated in the normal game, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be varied for a long time (for example, 3 minutes). It is configured so that the number of game balls decreases even if the right-handed game is continued. A game state such as this "X rush SUPER" in which a small hit game frequently occurs in a short time in a right-handed game and the number of game balls can be increased by the small hit game is collectively called "small hit rush". be.

(Type of special game of pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 32, the types of special games of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 32, the jackpot probability of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is 1/200 during the low probability, while the jackpot probability during the high probability is set to 1/40. (Common to the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol). Further, the small hit probability is 1/500 in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol and 1/2 in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

As an explanation of the types of special games of this embodiment shown in FIG. 32, the names of the types of big hit games and small hit games that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment are shown in "Types of special games". Has been done. The "state after the special game" indicates whether the normal game state to be transferred after the corresponding special game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed is a specific game or a normal game. "Ratio" indicates the ratio of which type of big hit game (small hit game) is selected when a big hit or a small hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ing.

The notation of "special figure 1_" and "special figure 2_" described in "type of special game" is either the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2). It indicates whether it is the lottery result of the lottery, and "○ R" indicates the number of rounds of the corresponding big hit game. Whether the "probability change jackpot" and "normal jackpot" will shift to the probability variation game ("X rush", "X rush SUPER") after the jackpot game (after the probability variation jackpot) or the reduced working hours game ("revival chance"). (Usually after a big hit) is shown. "Small hit" indicates a small hit game, but as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit _1" and "small hit _2" are configured to have different execution modes of the small hit game. (For example, "small hit _1" is opened once for 0.6 seconds, and "small hit _2" is opened twice for 0.6 seconds).

The content described in the "state after the special game" indicates whether to shift to the state of the specific game described in FIG. 31. In addition, "depending on the state before the start of the special game" after the "small hit" indicates that the game state shifts to the same game state as before the start of the special game (note that the end condition of the specific game is satisfied. If the variable display shows "small hit", the game shifts to a normal game instead of a specific game).

(Variation pattern table of pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment)
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a representative example of the types of variation patterns (variation times) related to the variation display of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. The vertical axis of FIG. 33 shows the types of fluctuation patterns, and the horizontal axis of FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the types of fluctuation pattern tables used in the situation when the fluctuation pattern lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed. The variation pattern shown in FIG. 33 is a typical example, and the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment can select other types of variation patterns.

The symbols "○", "△", and "□" in the figure indicate the approximate frequency of selecting the target fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern table, and "○" indicates the high frequency (1/3 of the total). ~ 1/10) indicates that it is selected, "△" indicates that it is selected at a low frequency (about 1/20 to 1/50 of the whole), and "□" indicates that it is selected at a very low frequency (1 /). It is shown that it is selected in about 70 to 1/200).

Since the type of the variable pattern table shown in FIG. 33 is a game in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly used during the normal game, the distribution of the variable pattern lottery of the first special symbol is illustrated. ("Out of place (Special Figure 1) Normal game" table). The variable pattern lottery in the first special symbol lottery of the normal game is performed by switching the variable pattern table depending on the number of reserved first special symbols. Although the result of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not illustrated, the variation pattern table in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the normal game is a variation dedicated to the special figure 2. A lottery is performed using a pattern table.

On the right side of the "out of place (special figure 1) during normal game" table, an example of the out of time fluctuation pattern during time reduction is shown. Since the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment mainly plays the game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the deviation variation pattern table during the time reduction is selected for the variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). Illustrates the variation pattern selected in. The variation pattern lottery during the time reduction of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) is determined by using the variation pattern lottery table for the special time reduction medium special figure 1.

Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern table of "big hit" and "small hit" shown as the fluctuation pattern table, it is shown that different fluctuation patterns can be selected depending on the type of the big hit game and the type of the special symbol at the time of winning the small hit. There is.

Here, there are two types of SP reach (A reach), "SP reach (A reach)" and "SP reach (A reach) _ role", but "_ role" has a target fluctuation pattern. When selected, the effect character P560 always operates (the first effect pattern of the superior character P650, which is a texture character) in the winning branch effect that informs the player whether or not the player is a big hit at the end of the reach. Shows that to do. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the variable display of the SP reach (A reach), which is the 10R probability variation jackpot that is most advantageous to the player, the effect pattern for executing the operation of the superior P650 is executed. In the case of other big hits, the operation of the superior P650 is not accompanied (or the execution frequency is extremely low because it is decided by the advance notice lottery, and it can be operated at the timing other than the winning branch effect, for example, at the time of the development effect to SP reach. It is configured to execute the effect pattern. In addition, even in the fluctuation pattern without "_-role", the superior character P650 operates at another timing during the variation display, or a notice accompanied by the operation of the horizontal character P670 or the lower character P680 is carried out. It is possible to do.

Further, although not shown, for example, during the execution of the small hit game "X Rush SUPER", the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is either "small hit _1" or "small hit _2". Depending on whether or not the small hit game is performed, the type of the special game (small hit game) won by the operation pattern of the lower character P680 (or the horizontal character P670) or the type of the lower character operation effect P872 is different, or the type of the special game (small hit game) is notified. It may be configured to be suggestive.

(Execution example of effective production using the production character of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment)
Subsequently, in the variable effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, it is effective to perform the movable character effect that gives the player a highly entertaining effect by using the effect character P560. An example of using the effecting object P560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36 along with a flow (time chart) of variable effect during A reach and B reach.

The contents shown in each of FIGS. 34 to 36 are as follows.

The "(a) production period" is a rough division of the production period of the variable production according to the production content. "Before reach (pseudo 1)" indicates the period from immediately after the start of fluctuation to the end of the first fluctuation display or the development of reach production, and "Before reach (pseudo 2)" is the pseudo continuous production. It is the variable display period of the decorative symbol P801 from the second time onward, which is dramatic during the one change of the special symbol when it is performed, and corresponds to the period until the reach effect development (because it is the same after pseudo 3). Included in the period). In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the normal reach is always executed when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, but in the case of the pseudo 2, the second variation of the decorative symbol P801 is performed. You may end by displaying the disengagement mode without performing the reach effect on the display.

Of the "(a) production period", the period indicated by "normal reach" indicates the period during which the low-expected reach production is performed, and the result of the normal reach is notified of the result of the winning / failing lottery, or is succeeded. It is a production period in which the development of SP reach is notified. The period shown in "SP reach" is a reach production period with a higher expectation of being a big hit than the above-mentioned normal reach, and is a production period in which the result of the winning / failing lottery is always notified as a result of the reach production. In this embodiment, the production period called "revival effect" and "reversal effect", in which the content of the notification is overturned and the hit is notified after being notified, is also included in this period).

"(B) Example of effect content" shows an example of the content of the effect executed in the corresponding effect period in the above-mentioned "(a) effect period". It should be noted that the examples are only representative ones, and other notice effects and the like are naturally configured to be feasible.

"(C) Example of operation of the accessory" is linked to the effect as shown in "(b) Example of effect content", and is linked to the effect of the effect P560 (superior item P650) provided in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment. , A horizontal accessory P670 and a lower accessory P680 as an example) show what kind of effect operation is performed.

In "(d) Example of accessory lamp", the light emitting unit in the production accessory P560 (explained by taking the upper accessory P650, the horizontal accessory P670, and the lower accessory P680 as an example) provided in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is used. What kind of light emission effect is executed when a movable character effect (exemplified in "(c) effect example"), a notice effect, a look-ahead effect, etc. (exemplified in "(b) effect content example") are executed. An example of this is shown.

In "(e) Other lamps / sound_features", what kind of light emission effect is produced by the effect lamp P82 (frame lamp P350, board lamp P550, or effect operation means P81 lamp) other than the light emitting portion provided in the effect object P560. An example of how to perform the effect and an example of the sound effect output from the speaker P83 are shown, and the contents to be particularly described are illustrated on the premise that the effect is performed in conjunction with the effect content.

The "(f) button valid period" is an effect (referred to as "button effect") using the effect operation means P81 (effect button P381, lever P382, etc.) in each effect period (see "(a) effect period"). Indicates whether or not Since the presence or absence of the button effect depends on the advance notice effect to be executed, the reach effect (such as the advance notice effect during reach), the timing of execution and the presence or absence of execution are not limited to the examples shown in the figure.

In the "(f) button valid period", the area shown in black indicates the period during which the operation of the effect operating means P81, which the player needs to operate in order to advance the effect, is effective. Is an effect period in which an image imitating the effect operation means P81 (operation promotion image such as the button image P881 and the lever image P882) is displayed, and the player is urged to input the necessary effect operation means P81. On the other hand, during the period shown by the diagonal lines in the figure, the input operation of the predetermined effect operation means P81 defined for the effect is effective, but the operation promotion image such as the button image P881 is not displayed and the button effect is displayed. It indicates that it is an effect period (referred to as "back button effect") that does not clearly indicate that it is a period. The area painted on the checkered pattern in the figure indicates the timing of the winning branch effect, which is the effect timing for notifying the result of the winning / failing lottery, among the button effects. During the back button effect period, the operation promotion image such as the button image P881 is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80, while the light emitting unit provided in the effect operation means P81 is effective for input operation. It may be shown that the operation is effective.

"Back button effect" means the possibility of developing into a subsequent high-expectation effect such as SP reach when it is executed before reach (pseudo 1), before reach (pseudo 2-), or during normal reach. It is one of the button effects that are configured to suggest or suggest the jackpot expectation, and when performed during SP reach, are executed as an effect of notifying the jackpot expectation.

《SP Reach (A Reach): Missing, Small Hit》
First, based on FIG. 34, an example of the effect when the fluctuation pattern “SP reach (A reach)” shown in FIG. 33 is executed when the result of the winning / failing lottery is “missing” or “small hit”. explain. The variation pattern "SP reach (A reach)" performed in this explanation will be described with one variation pattern name, but as a variation effect, "pseudo-continuous effect" is performed and the variation is displayed multiple times. It can be applied to various fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) as long as A reach is finally executed as an effect, such as whether or not it goes through normal reach. As shown in FIG. 33, A reach is a variation effect that can be executed with a variation pattern selected even in the case of a jackpot, but is a 10R probability variation (special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot) that is the most advantageous type of jackpot for the player. , Special figure 2_10R probability variation jackpot), A reach is always executed according to the fluctuation pattern of "SP reach (A reach) _ role" in which the superior object P650 operates in the first production operation pattern in the winning branch effect. Will be done.

In the following explanation, the explanation will be given based on the flow of the variable effect that develops into the SP reach (A reach) via the pseudo-continuous effect and the normal reach. In addition, in FIG. 34, an example including the various branching patterns described above is given.

When the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to "SP reach (A reach)" is started, the variable effect corresponding to "Before reach (pseudo 1)" is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 as the variable effect. , As an example of the production content to be executed, one character or multiple characters emit dialogue notice, and various images change step by step (shape changes, size changes, colors change, gradually A notice effect determined by lottery is executed at the start of the variable effect, such as a step-up notice (such as moving to). In addition to the effect content that is decided by lottery as the effect content at the start of the variable effect, the look-ahead takeover effect (pre-reading) corresponding to the look-ahead effect that was executed as the variable effect during the variable display prior to the variable display. It is the same effect as the effect, and one effect pattern of the look-ahead effect assigned up to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead) is executed. In this embodiment, such a look-ahead takeover effect is also described as a "look-ahead effect" (in the case of explaining a look-ahead effect of only the variable display to be pre-read, the "look-ahead takeover effect" or "the look-ahead effect" is given. ”, Etc.).

An example of the production operation related to the production accessory P560 in the production period of "before reach (pseudo 1)" is as follows (in FIG. 34, "(c) Production operation example" and "(d) Example of the effect lamp". See).

Superior object P650: Does not work. The light emitting part of the superior object P650 performs an effect according to a notice effect or the like. (Fig. 34 shows the case of pseudo 1⇒SP reach (A reach) as another example of variable effect)
Horizontal character P670: When the operation of the horizontal character P670 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (line notice, step-up notice, etc.), the operation is performed in conjunction with each other. The light emitting part of the horizontal character P670 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect, but if the horizontal character P670 is used to suggest a big hit expectation or a development expectation for reach, a notice is given. Except for the period in which the operation is executed in conjunction with the effect, the movable accessory effect and the light emission effect according to the look-ahead effect are executed in preference to other notices.
Subordinate object P680: When the operation of the subordinate object P680 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous generation notification, normal reach development notification, etc.), the operation is performed in conjunction with each other. The light emitting part of the lower character P680 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect, but if the lower character P680 is used to suggest a big hit expectation or a development expectation for reach, a notice is given. Except for the period in which the operation is executed in conjunction with the effect, the movable accessory effect and the light emission effect according to the look-ahead effect are executed in preference to other notices.

During the period of "Before reach (pseudo 1)", the light emitting part (effect lamp P82) and the speaker P83 other than the effect P560 are basically the variable effects, which are determined by the lottery decision of the advance effect. Executes light emission effect and sound effect according to the execution pattern. In addition, when the look-ahead effect (pre-reading takeover effect) is executed at the same time as the advance notice effect in the look-ahead effect, etc. In order to effectively show the look-ahead effect using the effect item P560 together with the light emitting part of the object P670 and the subordinate object P680, the light emission display and sound effect corresponding to the look-ahead effect are executed (or prioritized over the advance notice effect). It may be executed at the same time).

Further, in the "before reach (pseudo 1)" period, if the execution of the button effect is decided as the lottery result of the advance notice lottery that determines the content of the variable effect at the start of the variable effect, the button validity period is set at the corresponding timing. appear. In the example of FIG. 34, one button validity period is exemplified. Depending on the content of the advance notice effect to be executed, the button effect may be executed multiple times, and each button is valid for a plurality of advance notice effects that are combined during the "before reach (pseudo 1)" period. Depending on the period, there may be multiple button validity periods. (Although not illustrated in FIG. 34, it may include a notice that the button validity period is executed as a back button effect).

Next, an example of the production content will be described for the production period of "before reach (pseudo 2-)" during the variable production period of "SP reach (A reach)".

When a variable display related to "SP reach (A reach)" is performed and the production of "before reach (pseudo 2)" is approached, a notice that can be executed in "before reach (pseudo 1)" is given as the content of the notice effect. The production can be performed even during the "before reach (pseudo 2-)" period. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, when the pseudo 3 or later is set, the tendency (content, type) of the advance notice effect that occurs because the effect mode changes to the “E stage”. Is changed, but if such a stage change is not accompanied, the same advance notice effect can be executed in the pseudo 3. Further, in the effect period of "before reach (pseudo 2-)", "pseudo-ream effect" (for example, display or horizontal role of the effect display device P80) for notifying that the pseudo-ream (revariable display) has been executed. Continue the display combined with the advance notice effect using the object P670, the movable accessory effect, etc., and some look-ahead takeover effects (for example, hold change look-ahead, zone shift look-ahead, etc.).

Examples of the production operation related to the production accessory P560 in the production period of "before reach (pseudo 2-)" are as follows (in FIG. 34, "(c) Production operation example" and "(d) Example of the effect lamp". See).

Superior object P650: Does not work. The light emitting part of the superior object P650 performs an effect according to a notice effect or the like. (Fig. 34 shows the case of pseudo 2 ⇒ SP reach (A reach) as another example of variable effect)
Horizontal character P670: When the operation of the horizontal character P670 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (line notice, step-up notice, etc.), the operation is performed in conjunction with each other. The light emitting unit of the horizontal character P670 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect, but when the effect operation is performed using the horizontal character P670 in a pseudo-continuous effect or the like, the execution period of the pseudo-continuous effect (for example, re-variation start). In (about 2 to 3 seconds immediately after), the effect operation of the pseudo-continuous effect and the light emission effect are prioritized and executed. As an example of executing the pseudo-continuous effect, for example, the horizontal character P670 is shaken for about 2 to 3 seconds immediately after the start of the re-variation, and the green (notify the pseudo 2 fluctuation) or red (notify the pseudo 3 fluctuation) horizontal character. Examples thereof include a light emitting effect by the light emitting unit of P670 and a display of the horizontal object operation effect P871.
Subordinate object P680: When the operation of the subordinate object P680 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous generation notification, normal reach development notification, etc.), the operation is performed in conjunction with each other. The light emitting part of the lower character P680 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect, but if the lower character P680 is used to suggest a big hit expectation or a development expectation for reach, a notice is given. Except for the period in which the operation is executed in conjunction with the effect, the movable accessory effect and the light emission effect according to the look-ahead effect are executed in preference to other notices.

During the period of "before reach (pseudo 2-)", the light emitting part and the speaker P83 other than the effecting object P560 basically correspond to the execution pattern of the advance notice effect determined by the lottery decision of the advance notice effect as a variable effect. Performs light emission effect and sound effect. At the start of the re-variation, etc., as described above, the horizontal accessory P670 is used to perform a pseudo-continuous effect that is a notification that the re-variation has been performed. And other effect lamps P82 may also be configured to execute an effect display corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect. In addition, if the light emitting unit other than the effect P560 and the speaker P83 are performing the effect corresponding to the look-ahead effect due to the hold change look-ahead or the zone shift look-ahead, the light-emitting effect and the sound effect corresponding to the look-ahead effect continue. It is possible to continue.

The button validity period occurs during the "before reach (pseudo 2)" period once or multiple times depending on the lottery result of the advance notice lottery at the start of the variable effect, as in the case of "before reach (pseudo 1)". Button validity period may occur (in FIG. 34, the case of once is illustrated).

Next, in the variable display in which "SP reach (A reach)" is executed, an example of the effect execution mode of the effect period in which "normal reach" is executed will be described. In this example, since it is a variable display in which the development to SP reach (A reach) is executed, the icon image (special drawing) corresponding to SP reach (A reach) is displayed as the display content of the effect display device P80 during normal reach. The display such as P804) is finally displayed as a result of the normal reach.

An example of the effect operation related to the effect item P560 in the effect period of "normal reach" is as follows (see "(c) effect example" and "(d) example of the effect lamp" in FIG. 34).

Superior character P650: Executes the movable character effect of the second effect operation pattern (weak pattern) at the timing when the icon image suggesting the development to SP reach (A reach) is displayed or at the timing after it is displayed. At the same time, the superior object operation effect P870 (red) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80.
Horizontal object P670: Performs an effect operation according to the effect content displayed as the reach effect of normal reach. If the corresponding effect operation is not set, it does not operate.
Subordinate item P680: Performs an effect operation according to the effect content displayed as the reach effect of normal reach. If the corresponding effect operation is not set, it does not operate. Further, when the back button effect is executed based on the input operation to the player's effect operation means P81 during the execution of the back button effect, the effect operation corresponding to the back button effect may be executed. In addition, when the execution timing of the character operation of the reach effect and the movable character effect of the back button effect overlap, the back button effect is prioritized and executed.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, in the back button effect during normal reach, the player continuously operates the effect operation means P81 (effect button P381) during a predetermined button valid period (back button valid period) during normal reach (plural). By performing a round operation or a long press operation), the light emitting part of the lower accessory P680 steps up in the order of white ⇒ blue ⇒ green (⇒ red ⇒ gold) and the lower accessory P680 changes every time the number of operations and operation conditions are satisfied. Execute "back button step effect" that performs vibration effect as an effect operation so that it rises by a small amount and returns to the initial position (step-up of the light emitting part is expected to be a big hit, SP reach development expectation, SP reach The final stage of arrival differs depending on the type, but it is always configured to reach green).

During the period of "before reach (pseudo 2-)", the light emitting unit and the speaker P83 other than the effecting object P560 execute the effect linked to the content of the reach effect. When the back button effect is scheduled to be executed during the reach effect, the effect lamp of the frame lamp 350 (effect operation unit P380) is made to emit light in a manner indicating that the effect operation means P81 is effective. When the player operates the effect operation means P81 at the time of executing the back button effect, the light emitting unit provided in the lower part P680 executes the light emission effect of the back button step-up effect. In order to increase the height, the panel lamps 550 provided around the panel may be configured to emit light at the same time.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, when the step-up effect is executed based on the back button step-up, the light emission display in the finally reached emission color is displayed even after the end of the back button step-up effect during normal reach. , It is possible to continuously display until the subsequent production timing. More specifically, the back button step-up effect during normal reach is configured to suggest the expected degree of jackpot in the fluctuation, and the advance notice effect (cut-in) of SP reach (A reach, B reach, etc. described later). It is possible to continuously display the final light emission mode of the back button step-up as the big hit expectation until the timing of the notice) and the winning branch effect. By doing so, as a player, when executing the SP reach, it is possible to confirm the display mode of the back button step-up as one reference information as to whether the result is a big hit, and the fun of the SP reach production is improved. Leads to. In addition, as a modification, from the final light emission mode of the back button step-up, in conjunction with the chance-up effect during SP reach, the light-emitting part of the subordinate P680 has a light-emitting color corresponding to a higher jackpot expectation. The light emission mode may be changed.

The occurrence of the button validity period in the "normal reach" period can be set at the period corresponding to the back button step-up effect as described above and the timing of the subsequent normal reach result notification (big hit notification or development notification to SP reach). Is. As described above, since the lower accessory P680 is an accessory that interferes with the horizontal accessory P670 and the upper accessory P650, the operating range of the lower accessory P680 for the back button step-up effect is set to a minute amount. However, as another method, during the back button step production period, only the lower character P680 can be operated, and the horizontal character P670 and the upper character can be operated. The effect content may be configured so that the effect operation is not assigned to P650.

Finally, among the production periods of "SP reach (A reach)", the production contents executed during the production period of "SP reach" will be described. In "SP reach (A reach)", a part of the background effect of the reach effect is configured to be different from the normal pattern (the pattern with the lowest expectation among the A reach effect patterns) during the SP reach. A chance-up notice that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high, a cut-in notice that characters and lines are displayed overlaid on the background of the reach production, and a notification of whether the result of the winning or losing lottery is a big hit. It is a period in which various effects such as button effects performed at the timing of the winning branch effect can be performed in a complex manner.

An example of the effect operation related to the effect item P560 in the effect period of "SP reach" is as follows (see "(c) effect example" and "(d) example of the effect lamp" in FIG. 34).

Superior item P650: Does not work (because the result of the lottery is wrong and a small hit). If the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit other than the 10R probability variation big hit, and the execution of the button effect is decided as a result of the lottery, the superior object P650 is operated in the first effect operation pattern. It may be configured in.
Horizontal character P670: When the operation of the horizontal character P670 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (notice of chance up during SP reach), the operation is performed in conjunction with each other. The light emitting unit of the horizontal object P670 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect (red light emission, and as a modification, white light emission in the case of the effect that the surrounding board lamp 550 emits red light). When operating the horizontal character P670, the horizontal character P670L, which is close to the place where the chance-up notice different from the normal pattern is displayed in a part of the background effect during SP reach, so that attention is paid to the chance-up notice. One of R may be configured to operate.
Subordinate item P680: When the operation of the subordinate item P680 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (cut-in notice during SP reach), the operation is performed in conjunction with each other. The light emitting part of the lower character P680 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect (for example, in the case of a green cut-in, the light emitting part of the lower character P680 emits green light, and the effect display of the green lower character operation effect P872 is performed. If it is a red cut-in, the light emitting part of the lower character P680 emits red light, and the effect display of the red lower character operation effect P872 is performed). If the back button step effect is executed in advance during normal reach, the light emitting unit of the lower accessory P680 continues to display the final light emission mode of the back button step effect until the timing of the winning branch effect. It is configured to preferentially display light emission. As a modification, for example, in the back button step effect, when the red cut-in notice occurs while the light emitting part of the lower part P680 is emitting green as the final light emitting mode, the degree of expectation is higher. The red display that suggests that is displayed according to the execution of the notice effect, and then the red light emission mode is continued without returning to the light emission mode corresponding to the green back button step effect until the winning branch effect. You may.

The generation of the button validity period in the period of "SP reach" can be configured to be performed when the button effect is executed when the cut-in notice is generated or other notice effect (chance up notice, etc.) is generated. Further, the cut-in notice and other notice effects during SP reach may be configured as back button effects. Note that this example (see “(f) Button validity period” in FIG. 34) is SP reach (A reach) in the case of a missed or small hit, and is configured so that the button effect is not determined as the winning branch effect. ..

<< SP Reach (A Reach) _ Role: Big Hit >>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 35, the content of the variation effect when the “SP reach (A reach) _-combination” is determined among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 33 will be described. The fluctuation pattern "SP reach (A reach) _-combination" is a fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the case of a 10R probability variation (special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot, special figure 2_10R probability variation jackpot), and the content of the variation effect is shown in FIG. Since it is almost the same as the case of "SP reach (A reach)", only the characteristic differences will be explained.

In the example of the effect content of FIG. 35 and the example of FIG. 34, the effect content that can be executed by the start of "SP reach" is the same. In the example of FIG. 35, the biggest difference is that the button effect (winning branch button effect) is always executed during the effect period of "SP reach (A reach)" (that is, in the advance notice lottery at the start of the variable effect). The winning branch button effect is always won), the special period is set before and after the start of the valid period of the winning branch button effect, and the superior product P650 operates in the winning branch effect to notify the big hit. It differs from the effect example of FIG. 34 in that (it operates based on the operation of the effect operation means P81).

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern "SP reach (A reach) _role" is a fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the case of 10R probability variation (special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot, special figure 2_10R probability variation jackpot). In order to greatly congratulate the player on winning the jackpot, the superior character P650 (texture character) is configured to always operate in the variable effect performed when the variation pattern is determined, and the effect is further enhanced. The operation start of the superior object P650 is configured to be the operation timing for the effect operation means P81 of the button effect (winning branch button effect). In addition, in the case of other types of big hits, since the fluctuation pattern "SP reach (A reach)" is one of the results that can be selected, even if the A reach is executed, the winning branch button effect is produced unless the lottery is won. Is configured so that it does not occur.

The operation of the superior object P650 in the winning branch effect is executed in the first effect operation pattern, the light emitting unit provided in the superior object P650 emits light in rainbow colors, and the superior object is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. The motion effect P870 is displayed in rainbow colors. In addition, in the example of FIG. 34, the pattern in which the superior object P650 operates in another type of jackpot is also mentioned, but in the case of another type of jackpot, it is differentiated from the case where the 10R probability variation jackpot is obtained. In order to achieve the above, the effect content may be configured so that the superior object P650 is operated not by the first effect operation pattern but by the second effect operation pattern, and the light emitting unit or the superior object of the superior object P650 may be operated. The object motion effect P870 may be configured to emit light and display in another mode (a mode other than the rainbow color).

During the special period provided before and after the start of the button validity period of the winning branch button effect, the operation of the effect object P560, which had been in a movable state until then, is stopped (returned to the initial position or stopped on the spot), and the board lamp P550. , The light emitting part of the frame lamp P350 and the effect P560 is turned off (or dimmed until it becomes dark), and the sound effect from the speaker P83 (at least the sound effect corresponding to the reach effect) is temporarily stopped, and the effect display device P80. The display in is blacked out (black screen display, notification that it is changing with the simple drawing P802, the retracted symbol P803, etc.), making the pachinko gaming machine P dark and quiet, and the button image according to the button validity period. It is configured to display an operation promotion image such as P881.

Then, after the start of the special period, when the player executes the operation of the effect operation means P81 during the button validity period of the winning branch button effect, the operation effect of the superior object P650 is started and the reach effect is supported. It is configured so that the light emission effect of the effect lamp P82 and the sound effect of the speaker P83 are restored.

In this way, in the variable production corresponding to "SP reach (A reach)" _ role ", the quiet period (attention period) is before the first production operation pattern (texture movement) of the superior character P650 (texture character). By providing the above, it is possible to make it easy for the player to pay attention to the operation of the superior object P650 and the execution of the button effect, and to further enhance the effect of the operation of the superior object P650. Can be done.

In the "special period", as described above, the effect lamp P82 of the pachinko gaming machine P is darkened, and the sound effect of the speaker P83 is not limited, and the effect lamp P82 is made to emit light with a unified color. It may be such that a special dedicated sound effect is emitted from the speaker P83, and it is easy to increase the degree of attention to the operation promotion image displayed on the effect display device P80 by the effect of the winning branch button, and the superior product P650 ( Any mode may be used as long as it is easy to draw attention to the texture).

In addition, the "special period" is the fluctuation pattern "SP reach (A reach)", and when another type of big hit is notified by the winning branch button effect (the winning branch button effect is displayed as a result of the notice lottery at the start of the variation effect). It may be executed when it is decided to be executed), and by doing so, it is possible to prevent the "occurrence of a special period" from becoming a "10R probability variation jackpot". In addition, the "special period" for attracting attention to the operation of the effect P560 does not necessarily have to be a button effect, and the period before normal reach or reach (before reach (pseudo 1) or before reach (pseudo 2)). It may be provided to attract attention to the superior product P650 immediately before the development of the SP reach is notified by the superior product P650 (texture character) in the period) or the like. Further, at this time, the superior object operation effect P870 is displayed on the display of the effect display device P80 which is blacked out so that the superior object P650 can be easily attracted attention, or the superior object P650 is slightly vibrated and the superior object P650 is displayed. You may perform a preparatory operation to blink the light emitting part of.

<< B reach: hit >>
Subsequently, an example of the content of the variation effect executed when the variation pattern “SP reach (B reach)” shown in FIG. 33 is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 36. Here, to briefly explain the outline of "B reach", "B reach" means that the "missing" mode is once notified in a normal reach or SP reach with a low expectation. It is one of the types of SP reach that is notified that it is a big hit if the superior object P650 is operated by the operation of the effect lever P382, which is called "lever chance" that develops after being done.

In the production example of FIG. 36, a case where the “missing” is once notified in the normal reach, then shifts to the B reach (lever chance), the B reach becomes a successful mode, and the big hit is notified is illustrated.

In FIG. 36, there is almost no difference between the “before reach (pseudo 1)” and “before reach (pseudo 2)” production periods as in the case of “A reach” described above. The difference is that the B reach is "before reach (pseudo 1)" and "before reach (pseudo 2-)" because the B reach is after the notification of the loss in the normal reach or the SP reach set to a lower expectation. ) ”, It is configured so that the development from the operation of the superior object P650 to the high-expected SP reach (A reach, etc.) is not suggested. Other details are the same as A reach, so the explanation is omitted.

Subsequently, an example of the effect executed in the effect period “normal reach” of the variation in which the variation pattern “SP reach (B reach)” is executed will be described.

When the variable effect related to "SP reach (B reach)" is performed, in the normal reach, the evacuation symbol P803 during reach is displayed in the corner of the effect display device P80, while the abbreviation for the effect display device P80. The changing decorative symbol P801 (final stop symbol) is displayed in a variable manner in the central region. In the decorative symbol row that is the final stop symbol, an icon image or the like suggesting the development of SP reach may be displayed as a special symbol in addition to the type of decorative symbol that is the evacuation symbol of the reach. Then, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol row that becomes the final stop symbol in the vicinity of the evacuation symbol during reach and the symbols before and after, or the special symbol (icon image) decreases, and notification of whether the reach becomes a big hit (reach evacuation). Notifications related to SP reach development (stopping the icon image as the final stop symbol) are executed, and notification is performed in a hit mode in which the symbol and the final stop symbol are the same, or in a missed mode in which different combinations are used. In this example, in order to explain an example of shifting to the lever chance after the notification of the loss of the normal reach, it is assumed that the normal reach ends in the missed mode, but the B reach (lever chance) is used as a special symbol such as an icon image. ) May be configured.

In this effect example, when the normal reach ends in an out-of-order manner, as shown in FIG. 37 (an example of effect display of the timing of (A) in FIG. 36), the superior object P650 is a preparatory operation, and a minute amount near the initial position. While performing a rattling motion that repeats the vertical movement of, the superior object motion effect P870 is displayed in the vicinity of the superior object P650. Then, in the vicinity of the stop display area of the decorative symbol P801 of the effect display device P80, the pseudo accessory operation image P874 regarding the superior object P650 is faded in (changed and displayed so as to be clearly visible by lowering the transmittance). As a result of repeating the effect of fading out display (changing display so as to increase the transmittance and slowly disappearing) multiple times, the pseudo-role motion image P874 is changed and displayed multiple times in this way, it is finally clearly displayed. In that case, it is notified that the transition to B reach (lever chance) is made, and if it is also out of alignment, the pseudo accessory operation image P874 is not displayed and the variation effect is displayed by the stop display of the out-of-order mode of the decorative symbol P801. finish. In this way, whether or not the pseudo accessory motion image P874 is displayed and the effect of inciting the transition to B reach (lever chance) by the movable effect operation of the target superior object P650 are referred to as "lever chance generation fanning".

When executing the "lever chance generation fanning", it is configured to display the superior object operation effect P870 together with the rattling motion of the superior object P650. It may be configured to suggest the degree of development expectation for B reach (lever chance) depending on the emission color and display mode of the accessory operation effect P870. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a hit, the light emitting portion of the superior object P650 and the superior object operation effect P870 during the lever chance generation are rainbow-colored (rainbow). By temporarily (momentarily) mixing light emission and display, it is possible to have a rare premier production pattern that can detect the acquisition of a big hit at the timing before the timing of the winning branch production during B reach (lever chance). It may be configured.

Further, at the time when the fade-in display and the fade-out display of the pseudo accessory operation image P874 are repeated in the "lever chance generation fanning", the pseudo accessory operation image P874 is displayed in gray scale, and finally B reach (lever chance). ) Is configured to display the pseudo accessory motion image P874 in color, but the pseudo accessory motion image P874 is also other than grayscale depending on the degree of development expectation for B reach (lever chance). It may be configured to have a monochromatic gradation display of a red system or a premier pattern mixed with a rainbow-colored display. Further, in the repeated display before the final display of the pseudo accessory motion image P874, not only the display method of the fade-in display / fade-out display but also other factors such as slide-in depending on the degree of development expectation for B reach (lever chance). The appearance method of may be adopted, or a plurality of patterns may be combined.

Further, in the "normal reach" period executed during the variable effect of "SP reach (B reach)", the horizontal accessory P670 and the subordinate object P680 are assigned when the movable effect operation is assigned to the reach effect. The operation is performed according to the produced production operation pattern. As for the lower part P680, the effect operation and the light emission effect based on the back button effect are assigned as in the case of "SP reach (A reach)". However, even if the back button step-up is executed as the back button effect of the lower part P680, in the case of "SP reach (B reach)", the stop display (stop display in the detached mode of the decorative symbol P801 once) in the normal reach. When the temporary stop display) is made, the light emission display of the final light emission mode of the back button step effect is terminated before the execution of the lever chance generation fanning. This is effective as a highly entertaining reach production by suggesting that the lever chance generation fanning is once disengaged and the player is disappointed and the player is disappointed. This is to demonstrate, and if the light emission display based on the back button step effect continues in the light emitting part of the lower part P680, the effect of the lever chance generation will be diminished (the development to B reach (lever chance) is detected. It will be done).

Next, an example of the production content during the production period "SP reach" and the specific production content of the B reach (lever chance) in the fluctuation production during the fluctuation pattern "SP reach (B reach)" will be described.

As shown in FIG. 38 (an example of producing the timing shown in the special period (B) in FIG. 36), the B reach (lever chance) is the B reach (lever chance) when the lever chance occurs at the end of the normal reach. After the start of, the effect lever P382 (frame movable accessory P360) is changed to a state in which input is possible (see FIG. 27B), and an effect display is performed to urge the player to operate the effect lever P382. At this time, the variable display is started again from the display of the disengagement mode at the end of the normal reach, and the decorative symbol P801 (“3” in FIG. 38), which is a big hit if displayed, is disengaged together with the pseudo accessory operation image P874. The decorative design P801 (“2” in FIG. 38) is crushed to display the effect. Then, when the player operates the effect lever P382, the superior object P650 performs the effect operation (second effect operation pattern) and crushes the out-of-order decorative symbol P801 to show that it is a successful mode (in FIG. 38). Only "3" is displayed, and the combination of doublets is displayed). In addition, instead of the combination of the decorative symbol P801 and the pseudo accessory operation image P874, which is a hit, the superior accessory P650 is configured to rattle at the upper position of the decorative symbol P801 instead of the pseudo accessory operation image P874. May be good.

During the B reach (lever chance), the horizontal accessory P670 and the lower accessory P680 are not set with a pattern for performing a movable effect operation, and are configured to stand by at the initial position and emit light from the light emitting unit. The embodiment is also configured to emit light according to the reach effect.

The effect lever P382 is effective at the timing of the winning branch button effect during the B reach (lever chance), but in order for the operation of the effect lever P382 to be effective, a preparatory operation is required in advance as shown in FIG. 27. The preparatory operation is performed before the valid period of the effect operation means P81 (effect lever P382) for the effect of the hit branch button effect. Since the B reach (lever chance) is an effect aimed at notifying a big hit by a movable effect operation of the superior object P650 based on the operation of the effect lever P382, the effect is to increase the attention to the effect lever P382. When the preparatory operation of the lever P382 is performed, the frame lamp P350 is configured to move and light the portion that emits light in order toward the effect lever P382 side, and is configured to attract attention to the effect lever P382. ing. On the other hand, the panel lamp P550 is moved and displayed so that the light emitting portion moves toward the superior object P650 in sequence.

The effect period and the special period of the effect operation means P81 are configured to be generated according to the timing when the preparation operation of the effect lever P382 is completed. In the special period, the above-mentioned "SP reach (A reach)" is used. In the same manner as above, the light emitting mode of the effect lamp P82 of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned off and dimmed (excluding the effect lever P382 and the superior P650), and at least a part of the sound effect output from the speaker P83. By stopping the effect and displaying the effect lever image P882 together with the character string "Drop the superior object !!" on the effect display device, the effect lever P382 and the superior object P650 are displayed to the player. Configure to focus on movement.

(Priority of display layer of pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, display priorities relating to the display of various effect displays displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 39 shows an example of the effect screen during the variable display of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, and FIG. 40 shows the display priority of various effect displays.

FIG. 39 shows an example of effect display during execution of the variation effect of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. In the display area of the effect display device P80, an image of two female characters walking on the road is displayed as a background image P876, and in the example of FIG. 39, a black figure is displayed as a character appearance notice P877. (At this time, since the two female characters in the background image P876 are also performing the action for character appearance notice, the background image P876 is switched to an image in which the two female characters do not exist, and the character appearance notice is given. The images of the two are displayed).

Then, in the effect display example shown in FIG. 39, the dialogue notice P878 (the dialogue of "who !?" and the female character image), which is displayed in combination at the same timing in preference to the character appearance notice P877, is displayed. The lower character movement effect P872 is displayed in the vicinity of the lower character P680 with priority over the dialogue notice P878 (at this time, the lower character P680 is a movable effect operation when the character appearance notice P877 is switched from the human figure to the character display. Because it is set to perform the preparatory operation or the fanning operation).

Further, a button image P881 is displayed in the vicinity (lower side) of the dialogue notice P878, and is displayed to urge the player to operate the effect operation means P81. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, in order to surely prompt the player to operate the effect operation means P81, the operation promotion image (button image P881, lever image P882) is the accessory operation effect (subordinate object operation effect P872). ) Is prioritized and displayed.

In FIG. 39, as other display objects, a decorative symbol P801 and a simplified design P802 for producing a lottery result of the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner are shown. In addition, as a display for displaying necessary information for the player that is not directly related to the current fluctuation display, a hold display object P811 and a simple hold P814 regarding hold, a separate notification image P830, a cumulative acquisition number display P824, and the like are displayed. it's shown.

FIG. 40 shows the high and low priorities set in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment (that is, the allocation of display layers, and the priorities are different) with respect to the various effect displays and other effect displays exemplified in FIG. 39. The higher the value, the more easily it is drawn on the display layer that is easily visible to the player). Hereinafter, the display contents will be described by exemplifying the display contents in order from the one with the lowest priority.

《Background production》
In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the "background effect" is set to have the lowest priority as the effect display content displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. "Background effect" is often displayed for the purpose of grasping the effect stage (effect mode) by the player, and the display of landscapes, characters, and objects is displayed as an animation, and the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner. It is an effect image that can be continuously displayed even if it does not exist. It should be noted that the "background effect" may not be visible in the game standby demo display, the notice effect of full screen display, the big hit effect, etc., which shifts due to the continuation of the period in which the special symbol is not displayed.

<< Notice >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, most of the image displays of the notice effect are set to have a lower priority of display next to the background effect. As shown in FIG. 40, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of types of advance notices are set with different priorities, and a plurality of advance notice effects such as "notice 1", "notice 2", ..., "Notice N". It is stipulated which display should be given priority when the displays of are displayed at the same time. According to the example described with reference to FIG. 39, since the character appearance notice P877 corresponds to "notice 1" and the dialogue notice P878 corresponds to "notice 2", the dialogue notice P878 is visually recognized by being superimposed on the image of the character appearance notice P877. It is supposed to be done.

<< Look-ahead / Pseudo-continuous production >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the look-ahead effect and the pseudo-continuous effect (the effect of displaying "x2" or the like at the start of re-variation) are displayed over a plurality of times of the variation display. It has an important role of notifying that the expectation of big hits is increasing (look-ahead effect) and that the expectation of big hits is increasing due to the development of pseudo-continuous production in the variable display during execution. Therefore, the priority is set higher than most of the preview images. In addition, there are exceptional look-ahead effects that do not apply to the display priority, such as hold change look-ahead displayed as a hold display.

《Character movement effect》
In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, when a notice effect accompanied by the operation of the effect character P560, a look-ahead effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect occurs, the jackpot expectation is relative to that without the operation of the effect character P560. It is designed to be high. Therefore, the display of the character motion effect (superior character motion effect P870, horizontal character motion effect P871, lower character motion effect P872, character full screen effect P873, etc.) that emphasizes the motion of the effect character P560 is announced. By raising the display priority over images, pre-reading effects, pseudo-continuous effects, etc. so that the accessory operation effects are not hidden by these effect displays, it is easy to attract attention to the movable effect operation of the effect character P560. It has become like. By configuring the operation of the effect P560 so as to easily attract attention in this way, it is effective that an event advantageous to the player is approaching, such as an increase in the expectation of a big hit of the effect P560. It will be possible to notify.

《Direction auxiliary display》
The "production auxiliary display" is a stage name display that notifies the player that the production stage (production mode) has changed for a few seconds at the timing when the production stage (production mode) is switched, and a character or the like during the reach production. Auxiliary display such as telop display that displays lines is equivalent. These displays are display objects that can be displayed only in a narrow display area at a very short timing when the character being reached speaks a line (timing when voice is output from the speaker P83) when the effect mode is switched. On the other hand, by displaying it, it can be used as a notice to notify the player of the production content or indirectly to notify the jackpot expectation (for example, the display color of the telop character is configured so that the jackpot expectation is different). In order to improve the visibility when displayed as much as possible, the priority is set higher than the notice and the character movement effect.

《Decorative pattern》
Since the "decorative symbol" (decorative symbol P801) is an important display object for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery of the special symbol, the display priority is set so as not to be hidden by the notice display or the character movement effect. It is configured to increase. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, during the high-speed fluctuation period during the variable display of the decorative symbol P801, the transmittance is increased with respect to the display of the decorative symbol P801 so that the player can hardly see it, and the display priority is high from the player's point of view. Display of various notice effects, etc., which are set lower than the decorative design, can be visually recognized.

Regarding the display of the decorative symbol P801, the transmittance is not changed to facilitate visual recognition such as a notice, but the decorative symbol P801 (display priority is low) that is changing and the decorative symbol P801 (display) that is being stopped and displayed. By configuring the display priority (high priority) to be different, the visibility of the changing decorative symbol P801 may be lower than that of the advance notice effect or the like.

<< Custom display (menu screen, volume / light intensity adjustment) >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the menu screen (effect custom screen) for the player to arbitrarily select the effect mode, the volume output from the speaker P83, the brightness and color of the effect lamp P82, and the like are adjusted. It is possible to execute a custom display for adjusting the effect during the game, such as a volume / light amount adjustment display for adjusting the amount of light, and an automatic operation mode setting for setting the operation mode of the effect operation means to automatic operation. These custom displays include those that can be displayed even during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and can be adjusted and set even during the execution of a notice or the like.

In addition, the display of the custom display is prohibited and switched to non-display at the timing of displaying important information of the game result such as the stop display of the decorative symbol P801 mentioned above, and during the period when the reach with high expectation is performed. It can be configured so that the information necessary for the player can be easily visually recognized. In addition, since the "custom display" is information that is not closely related to the production such as the advance notice production, it is possible to freely switch from the normal position to be displayed by default to a different display position. When a part of the image display area is covered by the operation of P560, the custom display to be displayed (or scheduled to be displayed) in the area can be configured to change the display position to ensure visibility.

<< Display of cumulative number of acquisitions >>
The "cumulative acquisition number display" is a display unit that displays the total number of game balls acquired by the player during the period in which the specific game state and the big hit game (or small hit game) are repeatedly executed, that is, during the so-called consecutive villa period. be. In addition to the cumulative number of winnings display P824, the round display P820 displaying the current number of rounds during the jackpot game, the jackpot icon P821 showing the number of times the jackpot has been executed, and the number of jackpot winning balls displaying the winning balls during one jackpot. The display P823, the count display P825 indicating the number of balls entered in the big winning opening during one round of big hits, and the like are also set to the same display priority.

<< Hold display >>
The "hold display" is the hold object P811 in the hold display area P810 and the hold object P813 in the hold object display area P812, and is special corresponding to the special symbol lottery which is the main body of the game in the current effect state (effect mode). It is a display area for performing display related to the hold corresponding to the number of hold of the symbol lottery and the random value used for the current variable display. Distinguished from the simple hold display P814 described later, in the "hold display", the effect display (for example, hold change) regarding the jackpot expectation of the hold random value and the random value used for the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current fluctuation is displayed. Production etc.) is feasible. The hold display may be difficult to see due to the effect display displayed as a special notice when the special notice, which will be described later and has a high display priority, is executed. The display priority of the hold display area P810 and the hold object display area P812 are different, for example, the display priority of the hold object display area P812 is set higher than the special notice, and the special notice (during reach) is set. While the hold display area P810 disappears due to blackout etc.), by continuing to display the hold object display area P812 corresponding to the fluctuation that is giving the special notice, the expectation of the special notice can be changed. It is also possible to indirectly notify by displaying the pending object P813 as a result of including the inclusion in a composite manner.

《Special notice (example: blackout display, result production, etc.》
"Special notice" is a production display that attracts attention to the production (especially the production display content that follows) for the player such as the blackout of the special period of the SP reach (A reach) mentioned above, and the SP reach that wants to emphasize other things. This is a variable display of a special symbol that is displayed with priority over other display objects in order to concentrate on a specific notice such as the effect inside. In addition, such a display is also used when it is desired to change the display mode of the hold display due to the effect display for displaying the game result such as the result effect executed at the timing of the final change of the time-saving game, or the stage change effect. It may be set as a special notice with high priority.

Although not shown, as the display priority of such a special notice, the notice display, the look-ahead, and the character movement effect corresponding to the fluctuation are not displayed by setting the display priority higher than the character movement effect, but it is reserved. Alternatively, a medium priority notice may be set so that the display such as the cumulative number of acquisitions is continuously visible.

Further, as a modification, among the above-mentioned character movement effects, the character full-screen effect P873 (rainbow color) when the superior character P650 (texture character) is used to notify that the jackpot is a big hit is reserved. Since the interest in the display or the like is reduced, the display priority may be set to be equivalent to that of the special notice.

<< Operation promotion image (button image) >>
The "operation promotion image (button image)" is for urging the player to operate the effect operation means P81 in order to switch the effect of the variable effect during execution, and for setting the selection content of the above-mentioned custom display. Since it is an image that guides the operation method and is a highly necessary display, the display priority is set high so that it will not be hidden by other displays. In addition, it is configured so that it is always displayed at a position that does not overlap with a display object having a higher display priority such as a simple drawing or a simple hold described later, or the display timing is not the same.

《Simple hold》
"Simple hold" is a display relating to the number of holds displayed in a display area different from the hold display area P810 which is the above-mentioned hold display, and is a first special symbol and a second special regardless of the effect stage (effect mode). It is a display showing the display of the number of reserved symbols by numbers, symbols, and the like. The display of "simple hold" is positioned as important information (important UI) for the player so that it can be visualized even when a special effect such as a special notice is performed.

《Separate notification》
The "striking notification" (striking notification image P830) is a display indicating to the player the position where it is currently recommended to launch the game ball, and is an important UI in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. Right-handed small display P832, left-handed small display P834, right-handed attention alert notification P835, and left-handed attention alert notification P836 are assigned. The right-handed large display P831 and the left-handed large display P833 are special displays that are displayed when the game state is switched (eg, the big hit start demo period, the start or end of a specific game (shorter time), etc.). It is treated almost the same as the notice (display priority).

《Simple drawing》
The "simple design" (simple design P802) is a display that indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by the variable display and that the lottery result of the special symbol is notified by the stop display mode, and the decorative symbol P801 is used. It is displayed as one of the important UIs so that variable display and stop display can always be performed even in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized. In addition, during the special game (particularly the big hit game), the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, and the display of the big hit effect may switch to non-display in order to give the player a feeling of happiness. During the small hit, the variable display of the special symbol is only interrupted, so it will not be hidden even during the special game (during the small hit game), and the stop display will be displayed during the small hit game. If this is done, it will be mistaken for a game result, so even if the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted, the variable display of the simplified drawing P802 can be continuously executed (the symbol is switched as the variable display). However, it is also possible to execute the shaking fluctuation during the execution period of the small hit game, that is, during the interruption of the fluctuation display of the special symbol).

Further, the simple drawing P802 displays one or two depending on the playability (game machine specifications, specifications) of the game machine. For example, in the second special symbol (special diagram 2) priority digestion control and inbound order digestion control, only one special symbol is always displayed in a variable manner, so only one simple design P802 may be displayed, but in parallel control. In this case, since there is a possibility that the two special symbols may be displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable that the simplified drawing P802 is also displayed in two places. Even in the case of parallel control, only the special symbol designed as the main body of the game may be displayed as the simplified drawing P802 according to the effect stage (effect mode).

"error indication"
Further, although not shown in FIG. 40, since it is preferable to configure the error display when an error occurs in the gaming machine so that it can be visually recognized in any situation, the display priority equivalent to that of the important UI is set. Set. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the display priority is set higher than that of the important UI 1 to 3, simple hold, separate notification, and simple drawing, but the display position settings are set so as not to overlap. Since it is set, there is virtually no effect even if the order of each display priority is changed.

In addition, when designing the right-handed attention alert P835 and the left-handed alert P836 with a large image in the separate notification, there is a possibility that the error image may overlap, so the separate notification is displayed. It is preferable to set the priority to the lowest of the important UI and error display.

(A production stage characterized by the operation of the production performance of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment)
Next, "X Rush SUPER", which is a production stage (effect mode) characterized by the operation of the production accessory P560 of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, will be described. "X Rush SUPER" is a production stage (production mode) corresponding to the gaming state of a probabilistic game (high probability / low base) shown in FIG. 31, in which small hits occur frequently and a normal electric accessory is used. Since the operating mode is the non-electric chew support state, by launching the game ball into the right game area P501R, the ball enters the large winning opening P751 arranged downstream from the normal electric accessory P770 during the small hit game. Is easy. Therefore, in "X Rush SUPER", the number of game balls is gradually increased by winning the big winning opening P751 during the small hit game even if the big hit is not obtained (referred to as "small hit rush").

As shown in FIG. 32, in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the second special symbol, the winning probability of the small hit is as high as 1/2, and the small hit is frequently won. Mode) In "X Rush SUPER", the same type of decorative pattern (for example, not doublet but the same display color) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 in order to visually notify the winning of the small hit. Three decorative symbols and special symbols for notifying small hits) are stopped and displayed, and the lower character P680 is made to rise at the same time. In addition, the production to notify that a small hit was won in such a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is performed only in "X Rush SUPER", and other right-handed hits such as "X Rush" and "Resurrection Chance". In the production stage (effect mode) in which the game is recommended, even if a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, it is not executed.

The operation pattern of the lower prize P680 in "X Rush SUPER" is set to a different operation pattern depending on the type of the small hit game won in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 32, there are two types of small hit symbols of the second special symbol, "special figure 2_small hit_1" and "special figure 2_small hit_1", and "special figure 2_small hit_1" is This is a small hit game in which the large winning opening P751 is opened once for 0.6 seconds, and "Special Figure 2_Small hit_2" is opened twice for the large winning opening P751 for 0.6 seconds. That is, there is a possibility that a player can obtain more prize balls when he / she wins "Special Figure 2_Small Hit_2", which is advantageous. Therefore, as the operation pattern of the subordinate P680 when notifying that the small hit has been won in "X Rush SUPER", the production operation pattern for "Special Figure 2_Small Hit_1" and "Special Figure 2_Small Hit" An effect operation pattern for "_2" is prepared.

In the effect operation pattern for "Special Figure 2_Small Hit_1", the lower object P680 rises to the ascending position sensor P687 and immediately returns to the position of the descending position sensor P686, and the position of the ascending position sensor P687 is performed. Along with the movement to, the light emitting portion of the lower object P680 emits white light, and the small white lower object operation effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. On the other hand, in the effect operation pattern for "Special Figure 2_Small Hit_2", the lower accessory P680 moves to the position detected by the ascending position sensor, and in the process, the lower accessory P680 emits white light from the light emitting portion and produces the effect. It is the same until the lower object operation effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the display device P80, while the lower object P680 rises to the position detected by the ascending position sensor again in the process of returning to the lowering position sensor P686. At the same time, the light emitting portion of the lower accessory P680 is made to emit red light, and the large red lower accessory operation effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80.

In addition, as a special production operation pattern of the subordinate P680 in "X Rush SUPER", when a small hit is continuously won in a plurality of special symbol lottery (preliminary judgment information of a hold existing due to a fluctuation that becomes a small hit). (Judgment is made by confirming the preliminary judgment information for the hold of the second special symbol that occurs thereafter), for the above-mentioned production operation pattern for "special figure 2_small hit_1" or for "special figure 2_small hit_2". The small hit game is executed a plurality of times without performing the return operation to the descending position sensor P686 (returning operation to the initial position) in the effect operation pattern and keeping the state of moving to the position detected by the ascending position sensor. In the meantime, the light emitting part of the lower part P680 is made to emit gold (a light emitting pattern in which yellow, white, and orange are mixed), and the large golden operation effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. Is feasible. By determining the type of small hit game with different profits and the number of consecutive small hit games using the pre-judgment information, the effect operation pattern of the lower prize P680 and the display content of the effect display device P80 are different. Even if the small hits are won frequently, the notification related to the small hits is not monotonous, and the effect of giving a sense of expectation to the game profit (the number of prize balls of the game ball) that may be given is produced. It will be possible to execute.

When a big hit is made in "X Rush SUPER", it is a superior when notifying the acquisition of a big hit with the operation of the directing character P560, as in the production stage (directing mode) corresponding to other game states. It is configured to use the object P650. Here, in "X Rush SUPER", when the interval of the small hit game (the fluctuation display period of the second special symbol for each time) becomes long, the feeling of a ball coming out based on the acquisition of the game ball by the small hit game (a large amount of games). Since the feeling of getting a ball) fades, in the probabilistic game that is in the game state (high probability / low base) corresponding to "X Rush SUPER", the electric chew support function is not working, but a special pattern The fluctuation time shortening function of is in the operating state, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is configured so that a short-time fluctuation can be easily selected. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, even when a big hit is made in "X Rush SUPER", the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than when a big hit is made in another gaming state, and most of them are configured. It is configured to notify the jackpot of the game using the operation of the superior object P650 (except for the exceptional jackpot notification effect, the variable effect accompanied by the operation of the superior object P650 is always selected. ing).

By adopting the operation mode of the production accessory P560 in such "X rush SUPER", in the "X rush SUPER", the player "big hit when the superior object P650 operates" and "the lower accessory P680 operate". You can enjoy the feeling and production of small hits and big hits with a simple and easy-to-understand game production with the feeling of "If you hit a small hit".

As a modification of "X Rush SUPER", a 2R jackpot or 4R in which an opening pattern (0.6 seconds x 5) having a large winning opening opening time similar to that of a small hit is executed in multiple rounds is executed. A big hit is provided as a result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and when these big hits are won, the operation of the lower prize P680 is the same as when the small hit is won, not the upper prize P650 (described above). It is configured to execute a "special production operation pattern") that is performed across multiple small hit games, and it is configured to make it appear as if the player has won multiple small hits even though it is a big hit. You may.

(Modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment)
<< Modification 1 >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the display content of the effect display device P80 and the effect operation pattern of the superior character P650 (texture character) during the reach effect are used to notify the player that the game is a big hit. It was explained that it is a pachinko gaming machine that provides a highly entertaining production that combines the movements of the object P560.

Here, as a modification, depending on the type of the production operation pattern of the superior character P650 (texture character) during the reach production, the degree of advantage in the special game (the number of prize balls acquired or the jackpot game) will be changed. It may be configured to be able to make suggestions regarding the type of specific game).

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the "10R probability variation jackpot" shown in FIG. 32 is the most advantageous type of special game, and when the 10R probability variation jackpot is notified, the superior object P650 is produced as shown in FIG. The rotating decoration unit P652 is expanded at the position, the horizontal accessory P670 is expanded behind the superior object P650, and the accessory full screen effect P873 is displayed in rainbow colors in the display area of the effect display device P80. (The light emitting part of the superior object P650 emits light in a color corresponding to the full screen effect P873) The content of the effect was explained.

Here, as a modification, as a pattern suggesting the type of special game by the effect operation pattern of the superior object P650, when the 4R probability variation jackpot (or some 10R probability variation jackpot) is obtained, the superior accessory P650 is produced. While the rotating decoration unit P652 is expanded and operated at the position, the horizontal accessory P670 is not expanded on the back surface of the superior object P650, and the red accessory full-screen effect P873 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 (upper). The light emitting portion of the accessory P650 may prepare a pattern for executing the medium expectation mode (light emitting in a color corresponding to the full screen effect P873). Further, in the case of a 10R normal jackpot (or some 10R probability variation or 4R probability variation jackpot) in which the expectation of profit that can be given to the player is low, the superior object P650 is used as the second production operation pattern (. It is also possible to prepare a pattern that operates in a weak pattern), does not expand the horizontal accessory P670 to the effect position, and executes a small expectation mode in which the superior object operation effect P870 is displayed in large red.

In addition, when shifting to a special game (big hit game) in a medium expectation mode or a small expectation mode, the effect of the light emitting portion of the superior object P650 and the effect image displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. When the effect is continuously displayed in red or the like and it is notified during the jackpot game that the jackpot is actually a more advantageous jackpot (for example, 10R probability variation), the light emitting unit of the superior P650 or the effect display device P80 is displayed. The effect image or the like in the area may be configured to switch to the rainbow-colored light emission and display mode displayed during the jackpot game when the 10R probability change is notified.

<< Modification 2 >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, in order to attract attention to the operation of the effecting object P560 when the winning branch button effect occurs at the timing of the winning branch of the reach effect. Although it is configured to provide a special period in which the player is in a quiet state, if the expectation is excessively raised, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be significantly reduced if the player is out of the game.

Therefore, as a condition for providing such a special period, a chance-up effect occurs during the SP reach effect period, and a cut-in notice during the reach effect is an effect pattern (for example, blue <green < It may be configured to generate a special period on condition that red <there is a gold cut-in pattern and red cut-in or more) is executed. By doing so, there is a possibility that the situation where a special period occurs is a situation where SP reach occurs and the chance-up effect is executed in the advance notice effect lottery, which is a big hit. It can be limited to high situations.

Further, in the case of such a configuration, the winning branch button effect is generated without causing the situation of being in a quiet state as a special period, so that the preparatory operation (rattling operation and the light emitting part of the superior object P650) is performed. While the light emission and the display of the superior object operation effect P870) are continued, the button validity period of the winning branch button effect is generated, and the setting is made from the mode of the preparatory operation based on the operation of the player's effect operation means P81. It may be configured to switch to the effect operation pattern (for example, the first effect operation pattern is used at the time of hitting, and the stop pattern is used at the time of hitting).

<< Modification 3 >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, in the "lever chance" which is the SP reach (B reach) shown in FIG. At the time of execution, the preparation operation of the effect lever P382 of the effect operation unit P380 is configured to be executed in advance, but the start timing of the preparation operation of the effect lever P382 may be changed at the same time as the start of the special period or after the start. good.

Further, when configured in this way, the winning branch button effect requires the operation of the effect button P381 (weak pattern, relatively low expectation of big hit) and the operation of the effect lever P382 (strong pattern). , With a relatively high expectation of a big hit), and in any of the special periods (such as the special period of B reach shown in FIG. 38 and the blackout display period of A reach). It may be configured to draw attention to whether the operating means P81 is required.

Further, after shifting to the special period for attracting attention to the operation of the effect effect P560 in this way, the button is valid when notifying the operation content requested to the effect operation means P81 and requesting the operation of the effect lever P382. By delaying the display start timing of the operation promotion image for notifying the occurrence of the period occurrence timing than when the operation of the effect button P381 is requested (for example, delaying by about 0.5 seconds), a sense of incongruity is given. , The length of the special period up to the button validity period (the period for accepting the input of the effect lever) including the preparation operation period of the effect lever is configured to be long, and the player is given impatience by the length of the special period. It may be configured to increase the degree of attention to the winning branch button effect.

<< Modification 4 >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, even if an error occurs in the effect object P560 and the movable effect operation is prohibited, the situation is the same as in the situation where the movable effect operation is not prohibited. It is configured to control the lighting of the light emitting part of the effecting object P560 by the light emitting mode, but under the situation where the movable effect operation is prohibited, the light emitting part of the effecting object P560 is different from the situation where the movable effect operation is prohibited. It may be configured to have a light emission effect pattern dedicated to the case of an error so as to light up.

Further, even if the movable effect operation of the effect object P560 is prohibited, the effect image that was planned to be displayed corresponding to the movable effect operation of the effect object P560 such as the advance notice effect and the look-ahead effect is also movable. By making it possible to display the image in the same manner as in the situation where the effect operation is not prohibited, it may be possible to configure the game to be playable without damaging the information related to the expected degree of the look-ahead effect.

Further, when the movable effect operation of the effect item P560 is prohibited, the operation of the effect item P560 is replaced with the operation of the effect item P560 at the timing when the movable effect operation of the corresponding effect item P560 should be executed. Corresponds to the effect image and other effects P560 by displaying the pseudo-effect operation image of the corresponding effect P560 and outputting the movable effect operation sound corresponding to the movable effect operation of the effect P560 from the speaker P83. The meaning of the image display to be displayed may be configured to be understandable.

(Characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment)
<< Feature composition 1 >>
The pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment has the following configuration as a first characteristic configuration.

The main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, the effect control means (effect control CPU) that controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and the effect controlled by the effect control means. A game having a device (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.) and an effect movable body (effect object P560) included in the effect device and capable of performing a predetermined displacement operation. In the machine, the main control means executes a special game that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied based on the progress of the game, and the special game includes at least the first special game. It has a second special game (10R probability variation big hit, etc.) that is more advantageous than the first special game (10R normal jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, small hit, etc.), and is at least the first as a production movable body. It has a production movable body (upper character P650) and a second production movable body (horizontal character P670, lower character P680), and the effect control means is a specific effect (suggesting that a special game is executed). The first effect operation pattern of the superior object P650) can be executed, and the specific effect is an effect that enables a movable effect in which the first effect movable body is displaced in a specific mode, and is a second special game. Is scheduled to be executed, a specific effect may be executed, and when the first special game is scheduled to be executed, the specific effect is not executed.

By adopting this feature configuration, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of effect characters P560, in which a superior character (texture character), which is a specific effect character, has a specific motion (first effect operation pattern, The special game acquired when the textured motion) is performed can be easily recognized as a special game that is advantageous to the player, and the content of the production can be simply and clearly configured.

<< Feature composition 2 >>
The pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment has the following configuration as a second characteristic configuration.

The main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, the effect control means (effect control CPU) that controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and the effect controlled by the effect control means. The device (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), the effect display means (effect display device P80) that is included in the effect device and performs a predetermined effect display, and the effect device. , An effect movable body (effect P560) capable of executing a predetermined displacement operation, and an effect light emitting unit (effect lamp P82, effect light emitting unit P560, etc.) included in the effect device and executing a predetermined light emission effect. The main control means is a winning / losing lottery regarding whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied based on the progress of the game. (Special symbol lottery) is executed, and the effect control means can select an execution pattern from a plurality of types of effect patterns including a specific effect pattern (A reach, B reach, etc.) as an effect execution pattern related to the result of the winning / failing lottery. The specific effect pattern is to displace the effect movable body (superior object P650) to a predetermined position in front of the effect display means when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the result of executing the special game (superior object). (Execute the first effect operation pattern of P650), in a predetermined period (special period) immediately before the effect movable body moves toward a predetermined position, a specific display (for example, blackout display, etc.) is performed on the effect display means, and the effect is produced. A gaming machine characterized in that a movable body is stopped at a position other than a predetermined position, and the light emitting mode of the effect light emitting unit is set to a special light emitting mode (dimming mode or extinguishing mode).

By adopting this feature configuration, immediately before the performance (winning branch button production) is performed by the superior character P650 (texture character) in order to notify the result of the special symbol lottery in SP reach or the like. After the special period (effect operation means), the operation of the effect display device P80, the effect lamp P82, and the effect accessory P560 (superior object P650) is set to a quiet mode (a mode in which the effect object P650 is concentrated) during the special period. It can be configured to attract attention to the operation of the effecting object P560 (superior object P650) (after the operation of P81), and the effect of the jackpot acquisition notification accompanying the operation of the superior character P650 can be enhanced.

<< Feature composition 3 >>
The pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment has the following configuration as a third characteristic configuration.

The main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, the effect control means (effect control CPU) that controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and the effect controlled by the effect control means. The device (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), the effect display means (effect display device P80) that is included in the effect device and performs a predetermined effect display, and the effect device. , A gaming machine having an effect movable body (superior object P650, horizontal accessory P670, lower accessory P680) capable of executing a predetermined displacement motion, and a main control means is predetermined based on the progress of the game. When the execution conditions of The pattern can be selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns, and the display priority is predetermined for the display content displayed on the effect display means according to the display content. When an effect pattern accompanied by a displacement motion is selected, it is possible to display a movable body motion-related display (feature motion effect), which is a display content related to the motion of the effect movable body, on the effect display means, and as an effect execution pattern. , In the situation where the effect pattern accompanied by the predetermined displacement motion of the effect movable body is selected, the movable body operation-related display is displayed on the effect display means, and is a predetermined notice which is the display content related to the execution or non-execution of the special game. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher display priority than the production display (notice production).

By adopting this configuration, the jackpot expectation is higher when the advance notice effect and the operation of the effect P560 are combined, and in the gaming machine, the accessory operation effect (superior character operation effect P870) is higher than when the action is not combined. , Horizontal character movement effect P871, lower character movement effect P872, character full screen effect P873, etc.) is higher than the display priority of the advance notice effect executed by combining the operation of the effect character P560. By setting, the effect of the character movement is not hidden by the notice effect, etc., and the visibility to the player is improved. It can be configured so that the display mode of the related full-screen effect of the accessory can be surely recognized.

<< Feature composition 4 >>
The pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment has the following configuration as a fourth characteristic configuration.

The main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, the effect control means (effect control CPU) that controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and the effect controlled by the effect control means. The device (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), the effect display means (effect display device P80) that is included in the effect device and performs a predetermined effect display, and the effect device. , A gaming machine having a plurality of effect movable bodies (upper character P650, horizontal character P670, lower character P680) capable of executing predetermined displacement movements, and the effect control means is a plurality of effect movable bodies. When a predetermined operation abnormality (step number over error, position check error, power start-up, etc.) is detected in at least one effect movable body of the body, the effect is being executed according to the progress of the game of the main control means. However, for each of the plurality of effect movable bodies, it is possible to execute the initial position return operation process for returning to the initial position of each of the plurality of effect movable bodies in a predetermined processing order, and the initial position return can be performed. While the operation process is being executed, power is supplied to the drive source of the effect movable body for the return operation to the effect movable body whose processing order is currently the return operation to the initial position. A gaming machine characterized in that power for a return operation is not supplied to the drive source of the other effect movable body that is not in the current processing order.

By adopting this feature configuration, if an operation abnormality of the effecting object occurs while the game is in progress (during the variable display of the special symbol), all the effecting objects P560 that can advance to the front of the effect displaying device P80 are Drive of the effector P560 that executes the process of returning to the initial position in a predetermined order (however, it is ignored if it is already in the initial position) and is performing the initial position return operation process. While power is supplied to the source, power is not supplied to the drive source of the effecting object P560 which is not the target of the initial position returning operation processing, so that the initial position returning operation processing of the effecting object P560 is performed. It is possible to reduce the amount of electric power required for the operation, and it is possible to prevent the operation of other production devices from being affected.

<< Feature composition 5 >>
The pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment has the following configuration as a fifth characteristic configuration.

The main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, the effect control means (effect control CPU) that controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and the effect controlled by the effect control means. The device (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), the effect display means (effect display device P80) that is included in the effect device and performs a predetermined effect display, and the effect device. , A gaming machine having an effect movable body (lower accessory P680) capable of executing a predetermined displacement operation, and an effect light emitting unit provided on the effect movable body to execute a predetermined light emission effect, and is a main control. The means executes a winning / failing lottery relating to whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied based on the progress of the game, and the effect control means is the result of the winning / failing lottery. An execution pattern can be selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns including a specific effect pattern as the effect execution pattern according to the above, and the specific effect pattern is the first effect period (for example, normal reach) and the second effect after the first effect period. It is an effect pattern having an effect period (for example, SP reach), and in the first effect period, the first effect period light emission effect (back) that suggests the result of the winning / failing lottery by switching the light emission mode of the effect light emitting unit a plurality of times. It is possible to execute the button step-up effect), and when the light emission effect during the first effect period is executed, until a predetermined timing during the execution of the second effect period (for example, until the winning branch effect during SP reach, or a chance). A gaming machine characterized in that the effect light emitting unit is set to a light emitting mode related to the final light emitting mode of the first effect period light emitting effect) (until the occurrence of an up effect).

By adopting this feature configuration, the jackpot expectation level notified by the effect using the effect P560 executed in the preceding effect period (the back button step-up effect of the light emitting part) is continued in the subsequent effect period. By displaying the above, while continuously confirming the jackpot expectation level notified by the production using the production accessory P560 in the preceding production period, the content of the production to be executed in the subsequent production has a sense of expectation. It is possible to provide a new and highly interesting production that you can face.

[Second Example]
The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration based on the above-mentioned prerequisite technology. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite technology and the present embodiment will be mainly described, and the common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as the prerequisite technique and the elements described in the present embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment relates to a gaming machine that executes a player operation effect that changes the content of the effect being executed by using an operation means connected to an effect control board as a technical field.

In the field of gaming machines, while gaming machines with various specifications are being developed, one issue is that the display content and display method (control method) of the player operation effect are more interesting for the player. It was sought to see if it could provide an operation effect.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment is in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having a highly entertaining player operation effect.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment executes the following three effects as characteristic effects.

The first characteristic effect is an effect (notice effect or reach effect) for notifying the feasibility of a special game state (big hit game), and an operation means P81 such as an effect button P381 or a cross key P383. It belongs to the button effect that is developed by the operation of. The button effect as the first characteristic effect is other than the above-mentioned 1 operation means (effect button P381), especially within the operation valid period requiring continuous operation of the operation means (effect button P381). A player operates one operation means (effect button P381) when a period for requesting the operation of another operation means (lever P382, cross key P383, etc.) is generated and the other operation means is effective. It is a button effect configured so that the development content of the effect can be different depending on whether the operation means (lever P382, cross key P383, etc.) is operated. In the second embodiment, the description will be given as "Battle effect A".

The second characteristic effect is an effect (notice effect or reach effect) for notifying the feasibility of a special game state (big hit game), and an operation of an operation means P81 such as an effect button P381 or a cross key P383. It belongs to the button production developed by. As the second characteristic effect, the button effect is a predetermined button image in front of the branchable part of the animation, which prompts the operation of the effect button P381, etc., for the advance notice effect and reach effect developed by the dynamic animation. It can be displayed at the timing, and it is a warning effect that changes the development of the advance notice effect and the reach effect depending on whether or not the effect button P381 or the like is operated at the timing. In the second embodiment, the description will be given as "Battle effect B".

The third characteristic effect is the setting of the effect mode related to the execution of the variable effect executed in the variable display of the special symbol in the normal game state, and the effect content (selection of the reproduced music) in the special game state (big hit game). ) Etc. belong to the selection effect. The selection effect as the third characteristic effect provides an auxiliary function when the player selects the effect content. As an example of the auxiliary function, there is a "random selection function" that randomly determines one production content from a selectable production content group (multiple production modes, production groups such as playable music), and a predetermined one. There is a "recommended introduction function" that presents the content of the production as a recommended production, and details of these auxiliary functions will be described later. In the second embodiment, the description will be given as "effect mode selection effect".

According to the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a highly entertaining player operation effect.

(Battle production A)
First, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44, a battle effect A, which is one of the characteristic effects in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 41 shows a display example of the early stage of the effect in the battle effect A, and FIGS. 42 and 43 show the effect selectively executed based on the operation mode of the player at the timing of FIG. 41 (C). .. FIG. 44 shows an example of the result display screen of the battle effect A (at the time of a big hit) and a modified example of the button operation instruction (timing of FIG. 41 (C)) in the battle effect A.

As described above, FIG. 41 shows from the start of execution of the battle effect A to the execution timing of the branch effect. The execution timing of the battle effect A can be executed at any timing, such as when it is executed as a notice effect immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol or as a reach effect after the symbol tempai. The example shows an example executed as a reach effect executed after the decorative symbol P801 is in the reach mode. The execution timing of the battle effect A can be appropriately set according to the importance of the effect, and is not limited to the one executed as a variable effect executed according to the variable display of one special symbol. It should be added that it can be appropriately executed as a look-ahead effect or a round effect during a big hit.

FIG. 41 (A) shows immediately after the battle effect A is started after the decorative symbol P801 forms the reach mode in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment. On the screen, an enemy character (ENEMY) displayed facing each other, a player side character (PLAYER), and a support character (MOB) as a supporting character are displayed, and a button image prompting the operation of the effect button P381 in the center. P881 and the operation means valid period display P885 indicating the valid period of the button operation are displayed. In FIG. 41 (A), "READY!" Is displayed above the button image P881 on the screen, and the valid period of the button operation has not started (the operation means valid period display P885 is activated. (The situation is that the validity period has not been reduced). Also, in the upper center of the screen, "Press the button repeatedly to defeat Mr. B !!" is displayed, and if the enemy character (ENEMY) can be defeated in battle production A, it is an advantageous event for the player (big hit). It shows that it is a production that informs that the occurrence of a game, the development to a higher expectation reach production, etc.) will be definite.

FIG. 41 (B) shows an effect mode after the introduction effect portion of the battle effect A shown in FIG. 41 (A) is finished and the valid period of the button operation is started. An image in which the three characters displayed in FIG. 41 (A) are kneaded is displayed in the lower left direction from the center of the screen, and a button image P881 and an operation means valid period display P885 are displayed in the lower right direction of the screen. There is. At the upper part of the button image P881, an operation mode instruction image P886 for the purpose of prompting the player to continuously and quickly press the effect button P381 with the characters "continuous hits !!" is displayed. In the battle effect A, the process shifts to the branch effect shown in FIG. 41 (C) before the mode indicating that the valid period has elapsed (expired) on the operation means valid period display P885. Although not shown, it may be displayed as an index that changes depending on the operation of the effect button P381, as in the enemy life gauge image P891 in the battle effect B described later.

FIG. 41 (C) is an effect performed to switch the effect development in the battle effect A. In the lower left area of the screen, an image of an enemy character (ENEMY) attacking and a character string of "DANGER" are displayed. Then, in the right side area of the screen, instead of the button image P881, the cross key image P883 (in FIG. 41 (C), it is suggested that the left key and the right key are effective operations) and the operation means valid period. The display P885 is displayed, and the player is urged to operate the cross key with the characters "Avoid with the cross key !!" as the operation mode instruction image P886. In FIG. 41 (C), the image shown by overlapping the cross mark with the button image P881 is displayed in the lower right lower part of the screen smaller than the cross key image P883 so that the button image P881 is not pressed. It is accompanied by an instruction display that prompts.

In the branch effect of the battle effect A (FIG. 41 (C)), the operation means valid period display P885 of the operation means P81 in FIG. 41 (B) notifies that the valid period has expired (operation means valid period display P885). This is an effect of starting the display before all the bars of FIG. 41 (B) become black or hidden), and the operation mode instruction (P886) executed at the timing when the effect of FIG. 41 (B) is displayed. Is executed with a different operation mode instruction (P886), and is instructed by the operation mode instruction image P886 in response to the player at the timing when the display of FIG. 41 (B) is switched to the branch effect shown in FIG. 41 (C). It is an effect to judge whether the operation can be executed. The operation means valid period display P885 in FIGS. 41 (B) and 41 (C) is displayed in the same manner, but the valid time itself is set to a different time, and particularly when the branch effect is executed. The operation validity period for the operation means P81 in the above is configured to be short, and is configured to increase the difficulty of executing the operation corresponding to the operation mode instruction in the branch effect.

In the branching effect shown in FIG. 41 (C), when the player executes the operation instructed by the operation mode instruction image P886 to the operation means P81, the effect content shown in FIG. 43 is displayed. On the other hand, the player did not execute the operation of the operation mode instruction (P886) in the branch effect, or continued to perform the operation mode instruction (continuous striking operation of the effect button P381) in FIG. 41 (B). In this case, switching to the effect development for displaying the effect content shown in FIG. 42 is performed. That is, in FIG. 41 (C), although the effect period display (display of P881 and P885) is not performed for the effect button P381, the effect period of the effect button P381 actually continues, and by pressing the effect button P381, the effect period is actually continued. It is determined to switch to the display of the effect content that is developed as if it is disadvantageous to the player.

It should be noted that during the period in which the effect of FIG. 41 (B) is being executed, it is expected that the operation mode instruction image P886 will not be followed, no operation will be performed on the operation means P81, or a branch effect will be performed. If the player takes measures such as slow operation, the difficulty level of the branch production may decrease, and the interest and fairness of the production may decrease. Therefore, the production shown in FIG. 41 (B). According to the operation mode instruction image P886 displayed during the period in which is being executed, it is determined whether or not the number of operations and the operation interval for the operation means P81 satisfy the conditions, and a branch effect (FIG. 41 (FIG. 41). You may switch whether or not to execute C)) (if there is no execution of the branch effect, switch to the effect development shown in FIG. 42). It should be noted that the display of the operation means valid period display P885 in the branch effect is intentionally delayed, or the effective period itself is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds, etc.) to switch to the branch effect, but the branch effect is performed. The operation mode instruction image P886 in the above may be configured to increase the difficulty of achieving the operation conditions and to maintain the interest and fairness of the production.

Further, the branch effect is configured so that the switching timing from the display in FIG. 41 (B) is different according to the effect pattern determined in the effect content determination process, and before the branch effect in FIG. 41 (B). It should be added that the operation mode instruction (P886) and the operation mode instruction (P886) in the branching effect of FIG. 41 (C) can also set a pattern different from that of the embodiment shown in the figure. Even if a plurality of timings for switching from FIG. 41 (B) to FIG. 41 (C) are provided, there is a possibility that the switching timing can be estimated from the operation means valid period display P885 due to familiarity or the like in FIG. 41 (B). In the period of FIG. 41 (B), the button image P881 without the operation means valid period display P885 may be used.

Further, since the branch effect is configured to suddenly switch from the display before the execution of the branch effect (FIG. 41 (B)), the operation mode instruction (P886) shown in FIG. 41 (B) is immediately after the start of the branch effect. ) Is highly likely to be executed by the player. Therefore, immediately after the start of the branch effect, the operation corresponding to the operation mode instruction (P886) shown in FIG. 41 (B) is treated as an invalid operation a predetermined number of operations or an operation input in a predetermined period, which is disadvantageous. There is a "safe period (or safe condition)" that does not switch to the production development (FIG. 42). Further, in order to assist the reaction to the operation mode instruction in the branch effect, the effect lamp P82 and the speaker P83 start from a little before (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the branch effect is displayed on the effect display device P80. It is configured to start the light emission effect and the sound effect corresponding to the branch effect, and even if the player looks away from the effect display device P80, the effect can be focused again and the operation mode instruction (P886) in the branch effect can be handled. You may do so. Further, in the safe period, the branching effect may be executed, but the operation means valid period display P885 may not be displayed.

FIG. 42 is an effect developed when the player cannot perform the operation according to the instruction of the operation mode instruction image P886 in the branch effect shown in FIG. 41 (C).

FIG. 42 (A) shows an aspect in which the enemy character (ENEMY) is attacking in order to show that the enemy character (ENEMY) is superior in terms of production. Subsequently, in FIG. 42 (B), it is shown that the player side character (PLAYER) and the support character (MOB) have collapsed and the production has failed, and the character string "sorry" and the decorative symbol P801 are shown in the center of the screen. The middle symbol P801b (4), which is the final stop symbol of the above, is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in a manner different from that of the reach symbol (3).

If the variation in which the battle effect A is executed is a loss, or if the variation effect pattern does not develop into the effect after the battle effect A, the decorative symbol P801 is stopped and displayed in the display shown in FIG. 42 (B). , The fluctuation production ends.

On the other hand, when the variation in which the battle effect A is executed is a jackpot variation, or when the variation effect pattern develops into the effect after the battle effect A, the display in FIG. 42 (B) is shown in FIG. 42 (C). (Resurrection production due to the appearance of other support characters) will be displayed, and the subsequent production development will suggest the execution of big hit games and the development of other high-expectation productions.

FIG. 43 is an effect developed when the player executes an operation according to the instruction of the operation mode instruction image P866 in the branch effect shown in FIG. 41 (C).

In FIG. 43 (A), the player side character (PLAYER) and the character string of "avoidance success !!" are displayed, and in the branching effect of FIG. 41 (C), the attack delivered by the enemy character (ENEMY). It is shown that the player side character (PLAYER) is avoiding.

FIG. 43B is an effect displayed as an effect following FIG. 43 (A), in which the player side character (PLAYER) and the character string of "CHANGE" are displayed, and the battle effect A is superior to the player. It shows that there is a high possibility of developing into (that is, the expectation of becoming a big hit is high, or the expectation of developing into a high expectation production after battle production A is high).

Further, in FIG. 43B, along with the button image P881, the operation mode instruction image P886 indicated by the character string of “continuous hitting !!” prompting the continuous hitting operation on the effect button P381, and the operation means valid period display P885 are displayed. ing. Furthermore, a character string "damage increases as the spirit is continued" is displayed on the player side character (PLAYER), and based on the player operating the effect button P381, for example, blue, green, red, There is a high possibility that the effect (spirit) that is additionally displayed in gold and the player side character (PLAYER) will be stepped up and displayed continuously in stages, which will be advantageous for the player. It is suggested that an effect suggesting is displayed. The effect shown in FIG. 43B is continuously displayed until the valid period of the operating means P81 indicated by the operating means valid period display P885 elapses, and when the valid period of the operating means P81 elapses, the display is continued (step-up). After performing a predetermined effect display according to the progress of the effect), the process proceeds to the development of the effect image as shown in FIG. 43 (C).

FIG. 43 (C) is an effect image displayed after FIG. 43 (B), and an image in which the player-side character (PLAYER) is launching an attack is displayed.

FIG. 44 (A) is an effect that may be displayed following FIGS. 42 (C) and 43 (C), and the display of the battle effect A is an advantageous event for the player (execution of the jackpot game). , Development to high expectation effect) is an image display displayed when it is notified that it will occur. In the example of FIG. 44 (A), it is displayed that the jackpot game is executed as a result of the battle effect A executed as the reach effect, and it is the final stop symbol in the decorative symbol P801. The symbol P801b is displayed in the center of the screen, and the state in which the three decorative symbols P801 are displayed with the same symbol by the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c that have already been displayed is shown.

As described above, in the battle effect A, the branch effect, which is a button effect, is generated before the operation means valid period display P885 of the button effect that is being executed earlier becomes a mode for notifying that the valid period has expired. The operation mode instruction image P886 different between the branch effect and the button effect being executed earlier is displayed, and the effect display content is displayed in an advantageous or disadvantageous manner based on the operation of the player on the operation means P81 at the time of executing the branch effect. By controlling the display, it is possible to provide the player with the battle effect A, which is highly interesting as a button effect.

44 (B) and 44 (C) show a modified example of the branch effect (FIG. 41 (C)) in the battle effect A.

In the branch effect shown in FIG. 41 (C) above, the player's operation on the operation means P81 is required, but in the example shown in FIG. 44 (B), the button image P881 and the operation means validity period display P885 are required. In addition, the operation mode instruction image P886 (an image instructing non-pressing) shown by the character string "Don't press!" And the image of the cross mark is shown. That is, it is shown that the effect is predominantly developed by the player not operating the effect button P381. As a specific example, as shown in the development shown in FIG. 43 (A), "avoidance success !!" may be displayed.

As described above, the branching effect does not necessarily require an operation on the operating means P81, but may be configured to require a non-operation. If the operation conditions such as the button operation being performed a predetermined number of times or more or being operated at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval are not satisfied before the branch effect, the variable effect pattern requesting the non-operation mode is required. Even in the situation where is selected, the mode may be changed to a mode that requires some operation on the operating means P81 instead of the variable effect pattern that requires a non-operating mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 44 (B), the game is played during the period in which the operation mode instruction image P886 (the image instructing non-pressing) shown by the character string "Don't press!" And the image of the cross mark is displayed. When a person operates the effect button P381, as an example, the enemy character (ENEMY) as shown in FIG. 42 (A) switches to the effect development in which the attack is launched. , It is configured to display the development that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the operation means valid period display P885 is configured to include a special period image P889 showing an operation invalid period or a non-pressed period, and the normal valid time display proceeds. It may be configured to require different operation modes depending on the situation in which the image P889 is in progress and the situation in which the special period image P889 is in progress. In the case of such a configuration, the image marked with a cross may be superimposed on the button image P881 during the non-pressing period corresponding to the special period image P889.

Further, the instruction of the operation mode instruction image P886 between FIGS. 41 (B) and 41 (C) in the battle effect A as the second embodiment described above indicates the operation of the different operation means P81, but other As a modification of the above, the operation mode instruction image P886 is configured to encourage the operation of the common operation means P81 (for example, the effect button P381) between FIG. 41 (B) and the branch effect (FIG. 41 (C)). (For example, a configuration in which "continuous hitting" and "long press" are instructed as operation modes) may be configured so that the operation mode for the operation means P81 (effect button P381) is different.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned "auto continuous hitting" operation may be enabled at the time of executing the effect of prompting the continuous hitting operation for the effect button P381 in the above-mentioned battle effect A. That is, even if the effect of prompting the effect button P381 to be repeatedly hit is executed, by executing the "long press" operation, it is considered that the "continuous hit" operation has been executed, and the repetitive process is executed. good.

(Battle production B)
Next, the battle effect B in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48. Each of FIGS. 45 to 48 is an example of a screen displayed while the battle effect B is in progress, and there is no display order or the like, and the battle effect B may be configured by the effect shown in one figure. The battle effect B may be configured to proceed by combining the effect examples shown in the above figure. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the plurality of effects shown in FIGS. 45 to 48 are displayed in order according to the variable effect pattern determined by the effect determination process. The display order may be such that the same effect is repeatedly executed, or a plurality of display timings are set in one variable effect pattern.

In the battle effect B, for example, as shown in FIG. 45, an effect display in which the player side character (PLAYER) and the enemy character (ENEMY) are fighting is performed, and the operation mode instruction image P886 is instructed as a button effect. When the button is operated, the meter display, which is the effect progress status suggestion image (enemy life gauge P891) at the top of the screen, decreases, and the enemy life gauge P891 has the target amount (all meters are gone, the remaining amount is the standard). When it reaches (below the value), it is suggested that in the variable display of the special symbol in which the battle effect B is executed, the execution of the jackpot game and the effect of higher expectation will be developed after the battle effect B, and the player. It is a production that informs that the development that is advantageous to the player is executed.

In each example of the battle effect B shown in FIGS. 45 to 48, two decorative symbols P801 are displayed with the same four symbols, and the mode in which the battle effect B is executed as a part of the reach effect is shown. The meter display, which is another effect progress status suggestion image (player side life gauge P892) displayed in the lower left of the figure, may be reduced due to an enemy character (ENEMY) attacking. In a specific display mode (all meters are exhausted, the remaining amount is below the reference value), it is notified that the special symbol in which the battle effect B is being executed is out of order, or the outlier is found. It is configured so that the effect display is performed in a manner of unfavorably developing the effect as if the possibility of becoming is increasing.

<< Production example 1 of battle production B >>
FIG. 45 is one of the display examples of the battle effect B, and shows an embodiment in which the player-side character (PLAYER) is attacking the enemy character (ENEMY). In the button effect in the situation where this display is executed, the effect that the enemy life gauge P891 is reduced is executed by performing the operation according to the instruction of the operation mode instruction image P886.

In the example of FIG. 45, as an instruction of the operation mode instruction image P886, the character string "press the PUSH button when the mark is entered on the target !!" is used at the timing when the button image P881 overlaps with the target image P890. It is suggested that the player operates the effect button P381, which is the operation means P81 suggested as a mark, to reduce the enemy life gauge P891.

In FIG. 45, four button images P881 are displayed, showing an aspect of moving while gradually expanding in the direction of the moving direction P896. In each button image P881, the target image P890 and the button image P881 have substantially the same size at the timing of reaching the position of the target image P890. Therefore, the button image P881 corresponding to the operation is displayed in the largest size next, so that the player can easily pay attention to the button image P881 corresponding to the operation, and even if a plurality of button images P881 are displayed. , The movement of the button image P881 and the enlarged display of the button image P881 make it easy for the player to measure the timing to be operated. If the button image P881 is operated at a timing not located within the target image P890, the attack of the player side character (PLAYER) fails, so that the enemy life gauge P891 does not decrease, but the timing. Is configured to have a predetermined allowable range. Although not shown, if the button image P881 is operated at the timing when it is located in the target image P890, a success effect (for example, an effect of displaying "GOOD !!") is executed, and the button image P881 is executed. If is operated at a timing when is not located in the target image P890, a failure effect (for example, an effect displayed as "BAD ...") is executed.

The button image P881 is enlarged and displayed so as to have the largest size at the timing (or immediately before) reaching the center position of the target image P890, and the button image P881 has the same size during the period controlled as the target of the success effect. Be maintained. When the relative position of the button image P881 with respect to the target image P890 becomes the target of the failure effect, the button image P881 is moved and displayed in a direction away from the center position of the target image P890 while being reduced, and the effect button P381 is displayed. The button image P881 is deleted at a timing (or before or after) when it is excluded from the operation target.

As shown in the figure, a plurality of button images P881 can be displayed at the same time, and when the effect button P381 is operated when the button image P881 is displayed in the vicinity of the target image P890, or the player operates the button image P381. When the button image P881 moves beyond the target image P890 without performing the button image P881, the corresponding button image P881 (in this example, the button image P881 before being the target of the failure effect, and is the center of the target image P890 most. The button image P881) near the position is erased, and a new button image P881 can be additionally displayed during the execution of the effect. Further, the mode of the success effect may be different depending on the degree of overlap between the target image P890 and the button image P881 at the timing when the player operates the effect button P381. For example, if the center of the target image P890 and the button image P881 match at an appropriate timing, "EXCELLENT !!" is displayed as a success effect, and the center of the target image P890 and the button image P881 are slightly deviated. An example is given in which "GOOD !!" is displayed as a success effect if the timing is appropriate within the permissible range. Also in the examples of FIGS. 46 to 48, which will be described later, the button image P881 is appropriately erased and displayed in the same manner according to the content of the effect.

<< Production example 2 of battle production B >>
FIG. 46 shows an example of an effect image displayed at the attack timing of the enemy character (ENEMY) in the battle effect B. In the battle effect B in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the player side life gauge P892 is displayed as another effect effect suggestion image, and in the effect display example shown in FIG. 46, the enemy character (ENEMY) is displayed. It is shown that the player side character (PLAYER) performs a defense / avoidance action by preventing the attack based on the operation of the operation means P81, and the effect display that the player side life gauge P892 does not decrease is executed. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 46, the operation mode instruction image P886 is displayed as "continuous hit" and "destroy before the enemy button enters the target !!", and the button image P881 is also displayed. This indicates that the player must perform a plurality of input operations on the effect button P381.

Further, FIG. 46 displays a button image P893 for an enemy character (an object image suggesting the timing at which an enemy character's attack is established), and approaches the target image P890 while moving along the movement direction P896. It is configured as follows. Before the enemy character button image P893 overlaps with the target image P890, the effect display is performed in such a manner that the operation conditions of the predetermined effect button P381 must be satisfied. Even during the period when the button image P893 for the enemy character is displayed, the effect period of the effect button P381 may be suggested by displaying the operation means valid period display P885. In such a configuration, the operation means valid period display P885 may be fixedly displayed in a predetermined display area, or may be displayed so as to move with the movement of the button image P893 for the enemy character. ..

In the effect example of FIG. 46, an effect generated by the player operating the effect button P381 is generated from the button image P881 toward the enemy character button image P893, and attempts to destroy the enemy character button image P893. Is displayed. Although not shown, the button image P893 for enemy characters gradually flashes red as the operation conditions are approached, and when the operation conditions are achieved, the button image P893 explodes and disappears. Indicates that the attack of the enemy character (ENEMY) has failed.

In addition, in battle production B, by reducing the player's life gauge P892, you may lose the battle (the fluctuation display of the special symbol may be "off", which is a disadvantageous development). In order to configure the player to feel the tension, the enemy character (ENEMY) may be attacked without displaying the button image P893 for the enemy character, which cannot be achieved in reality. It may be configured to display the button image P893 for an enemy character under such achievement conditions (destruction conditions).

<< Production example 3 of battle production B >>
FIG. 47 shows another display example of the battle effect B. In the effect display example of FIG. 47, a support character (MOB) is displayed in addition to the player side character (PLAYER), and an effect is executed in which a display is performed in which two people attack an enemy character (ENEMY). It shows that it has been done.

Similar to the instruction in FIG. 45, the instruction of the operation mode instruction image P886 in FIG. 47 indicates that the operation means P81 is operated when the mark is entered in the target, except that the effect button P381 and the effect button P381 are instructed to operate the operation means P81. The difference is that the player is required to operate the left key of the cross key P383. In the battle effect B of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the player side character (PLAYER) attacks by operating the effect button P381, and the support character (MOB) attacks by operating the cross key P383. Has been done.

In the upper right direction of the screen, a circular target image P890 for suggesting the operation timing of the effect button P381 and a square target image P890 for suggesting the operation timing of the left key of the cross key P383 are displayed. An aspect in which the button image P881 and the cross-shaped key image P883 are moving toward each target image P890 (movement direction P896) is shown.

Further, in the area on the right side of the plurality of button images P881 and the cross key image P883, a character string of "continuously hit" as an operation mode instruction image P886, and a plurality of button images P881 and the cross key image P883 are displayed in the area surrounded by the square. The special operation period image P897 displayed on top of each other is displayed. The special operation period image P897 determines whether or not the internal button image 881 (cross key image P883) overlaps the target image P890 during the period when a part of the special operation period image P897 overlaps with each target image P890. A display indicating that it is an effect period in which an attack is performed by the player side character (PLAYER) based on the operation of the player's effect button P381 (cross key P383) and the effect of reducing the enemy life gauge P891 is executed. Is.

In the above description, the attack by the player side character (PLAYER) and the support character (MOB) is executed, but as shown in FIG. 46 at a predetermined timing of the display period of FIG. 47. Operation mode instruction image P886 for achieving the destruction conditions of the button image P893 for the enemy character and the button image P893 for the enemy character and the button image (promoting the operation of an operation means different from the operation means for attacking the player side character or the like). An image is preferable) and the like may be displayed. Further, the example of displaying the button image P893 for the enemy character during the effect display mainly for the attack of the player-side character may be implemented in other examples shown in FIGS. 45 and 48.

<< Production example 4 of battle production B >>
FIG. 48 is one of the display examples in the battle effect B, and shows a state in which the player side character (PLAYER), the support character (MOB), and the enemy character (ENEMY) are kneading each other.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 48, unlike the other effect examples shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, the target image P890 is moved and displayed with respect to the button image P881 or the like instructing the player operation on the operation means P81. It differs in that it is executed in. Therefore, the operation mode instruction image P886 is expressed as "press the button when the target overlaps the mark !!".

In the example of FIG. 48, the button image P881 is spirally arranged around each character, and the earlier the operation order is, the larger the button image P881 is displayed. In the example of FIG. 48, the target image P890 is moved and displayed in a spiral movement trajectory counterclockwise, and the player is requested to operate the effect button P381 at a position overlapping with each button image P881. There is. Similar to the example of FIG. 45, each button image P881 is gradually enlarged and displayed on the spot so that the target image P890 has substantially the same size as the target image P890 at the timing when it overlaps with the button image P881. As a player, it is possible to identify which button image the button image P881 corresponding to the next operation is, and the button operation is focused on the next button image and the target image P890 that is moved and displayed. It is possible to measure the timing.

According to the battle effect B executed as described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48 above, the effect suggestion of the button image or the like is matched with the display of the character or the like display object of the effect animation image that is dynamically displayed. It is possible to provide a highly interesting button effect that displays an effect that is highly related to the demand for various operation modes and the development of the effect display, such as displaying an image and operating it at the same timing.

Further, in the battle effect B of the second embodiment, at least one of the target image P890 and the button image P881 suggesting the timing of the button operation is dynamically changed so that the position relative to the other changes. By gradually increasing the size of the button image P881 and changing the relative size relationship between the target image P890 and the button image, it is possible to measure the operation timing. Even if the target image P890, the button image P881, and the like are displayed in various places, it is possible to appropriately notify the timing of prompting the player to operate and the order of the target button images P881.

In the second embodiment, the target image P890 and the button image P881 and the like, one of which is dynamically displayed, are configured to change the two conditions of the relative position relationship and the relative size. , The target image P890 and the button image P881 are displayed in the same number with substantially the same coordinates as the center position, and by the enlarged display of the button image P881 and the reduced display of the target image P890 (or the enlarged display of the button image P881 and the target image P890). It may be configured to suggest the operation timing based on the relationship between the sizes of both (by one of the reduced displays).

Further, as long as the battle effect B in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment has the same control as the button effect, the display mode of the effect is not limited to the type of effect of "battle", and the effect is appropriately applied. It is possible. Further, it may have the following production and control modification examples.

The button image P893 for an enemy character shown in the example of FIG. 46 is a button image (misidentified as a player operation) substantially equivalent to a button image of a button effect used when a player-side character (PLAYER) performs an attack action or the like. In order to avoid this, it is preferable to change the color arrangement etc. or to make an additional display), as if the player side character (PLAYER) and the enemy character (ENEMY) are fighting under equal conditions. It may be configured to show. Further, depending on whether or not the destruction of the button image P893 for the enemy character is achieved, whether the character to be attacked next is the player side character (PLAYER) or the enemy character (ENEMY) is made different. It may be configured to display the effect development including the button operation and the effect display according to the operation.

Further, as shown in the example of FIG. 47, when requesting an operation for two operation means (may be two or more operation means), two or more types of button images P881, cross key image P883, and the like are simultaneously targeted images. It may be configured to reach P890, and if simultaneous operations are not executed, it may not be a valid input and may be configured to produce a failure mode.

As another modification, information such as the number of times that the operation of the effect button P381 can be continuously operated according to the instruction of the operation mode instruction image P886 is counted (referred to as the number of combos), and as the number of combos increases, the number of combos is increased. Using the value of the number of combos as feedback information, a lottery such as replacement of the production content is performed during the production, the number of appearances of the operation instruction image of the operation means P81 such as the production button image P881 is increased, and the enemy life gauge P891 is reduced. By performing the effect control that executes the content change control in real time, such as increasing the amount of the effect, the effect may be developed so as to increase the possibility that a favorable result is suggested to the player.

Further, in the battle effect B in the second embodiment described above, by displaying the player side life gauge P892 at the lower left of the screen, a display indicating the possibility and timing of displaying an effect disadvantageous to the player is displayed. Although it was configured to be performed, the role of the meter display at the bottom left of the screen was changed, for example, based on the effective operation of the button operation that is advantageous to the player side (the operation that becomes the attack of the player side character (PLAYER)). When the meter display (P892) is increased and the meter reaches a specific display (full tank, exceeds the standard value), the player side character (PLAYER) performs a special move and the result of battle production B is displayed. It may be configured to be displayed.

Further, the amount of increase or decrease of the player side life gauge P892 or the enemy life gauge P891 may be configured to differ depending on the timing of the button operation. As a specific example, when the button operation is performed at the most appropriate timing for the button operation (for example, the timing when all the marks overlap the target), "EXCELLENT !!" is displayed and the enemy life gauge is displayed. If P891 is reduced by half and the button is operated at the second most appropriate timing for button operation (for example, the timing when a part of the mark overlaps the target), "GOOD!" Is displayed. If the enemy life gauge P891 is reduced by 1/4 and the button is operated at a timing that is not appropriate for the button operation (for example, the timing when the mark does not overlap the target), "BAD ..." is displayed. It may be configured so as not to reduce the enemy life gauge P891.

As another modification, the enemy character drops the item based on the button operation (the operation that becomes the attack of the player side character (PLAYER)) that is advantageous to the player side during the execution of the battle effect B. , The dropped item (drop item) may be used in the subsequent production. As an example of using the drop item, it is used for chance-up notification as a notification of the execution expectation of the jackpot game in the variable display of the special symbol in which the battle effect B is executed and the variable display of the special symbol executed later. It is conceivable to add a customization function such as changing the determination tendency of the variable effect to the player's preference, adding a song that can be selected as a song to be played as BGM, and the like.

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 44 to 48 described in the second embodiment, the example of the effect of displaying the two-dimensional animation data is illustrated, but the effect display method of drawing the image of the 3D data in real time is adopted. If it is a gaming machine, it is possible to change the content of the production by more detailed control. For example, when a 3D video in which a player-side character (PLAYER) punches an enemy character (ENEMY) is output, a button image P881 is superimposed on the limbs of the player-side character (PLAYER) for a short period of time. A method such as overlapping and outputting only (0.5 seconds), and whether or not to display the injured texture on the enemy character (ENEMY) on top of each other depending on whether or not the operation of the effect button P381 could be executed during the same period. Can also be adopted.

In the case of the effect display based on such 3D data, the player side character (PLAYER) drawn in real time is not measured by using the target image P890 and the button image P881 as in the second embodiment. ) May be configured so that the effect content changes by being operated by the player according to the attack (additional injury effect is displayed on the enemy character (ENEMY), etc.), or the player side character (PLAYER). The cross key image P883 and the button image P881 are displayed corresponding to the right arm and the left arm, respectively, and the arm that delivers a punch depending on whether the cross key P383 or the effect button P381 is operated. Switch whether to display the image as either the right arm or the left arm (or control so that the attack can be performed more efficiently by operating alternately than when operating only one of them continuously), etc. You may display the change of the attack pattern of.

(Direction mode selection production)
Subsequently, using FIGS. 49 to 51, the player's effect content (effect mode, BGM music, selection of content of developing advance notice effect, other customization, etc.) to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine in the second embodiment is performed. We will explain the characteristic contents of the production that can be selected arbitrarily. In the second embodiment, the "effect mode selection effect" is an effect of selecting the effect mode in the specific game state after the big hit game, which is often performed in a specific round during the big hit game or during the big hit end demo effect period. Will be described as the main embodiment. Regarding the display contents shown in the figure, the description of the display contents similar to those of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine will be omitted unless necessary.

In the display example shown in FIG. 49, an example is shown in which an effect of selecting an effect mode in a specific game state is displayed at the timing when the 10th unit game (10th round game) in the big hit game is executed. There is. In the example of FIG. 49, a selection target object image P856 (an image displayed as the production mode A to the production mode D) that expands in a fan shape from the substantially center of the screen to the left side area of the screen, and a frame shape indicating the current selection target. The selection cursor P857 is displayed, indicating that the effect mode B can be selected (determined operation is possible) as the effect mode in the specific game state.

In the display of FIG. 49, the selection target object P856 relating to the effect mode D is displayed in gray, and the display mode is different from that of the selection target object P856 from the other effect modes A to the effect mode C. It is shown that the selection target object P856 displayed in gray in this way is an effect unopened object, and is in an effect mode (effect content) in which it cannot be selected by the selection operation described later. The unopened selection target object P856 such as the effect mode D is specified as the number of consecutive villas in which the jackpot game and the specific game state are repeatedly performed, the number of times the variation display of the special symbol in the normal game state is varied, and the variation effect. It is configured to be in the open state due to various factors such as winning the variation effect of the pattern, and to be switched to the display with a white background as the selection target object P856 that can be selected by the selection operation.

Further, in the example of FIG. 49, for the effect mode B selected by the selection cursor P857, the effect outline of the corresponding effect is displayed as "mode explanation", and reference information for the player to select the effect content. Is presented. Although not shown, the effect mode as the object to be selected is not limited to the effect mode A to the effect mode D, and other effect modes may be selectable. In the example of FIG. 49, all select target objects are selected. Of these, four are displayed as the upper limit, and the types of the selection target objects P856 displayed up and down depending on the type of the selection target object P856 displayed on the selection cursor P857 are changed while shifting in a circular shape. It is configured as follows.

Subsequently, a selection operation of the effect content (effect mode) of the effect mode selection effect shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 and a display example based on the operation will be described.

First, in FIG. 49, the cross key image P883 and the button image P881 are displayed in the selection method explanatory image display area P858 as a display relating to the selection operation of the effect content. Here, the character string "determine" is displayed following the button image P881, and the current selection target object P856 indicated by the selection cursor P857 is selected by the player based on the operation of the effect button P381. It is shown to be determined as.

The cross key image P883 displays "change mode" in the vertical direction of the up key and the down key, and the selection target object P856 to be selected by operating the up key or the down key of the cross key P383. Is shown to be changed to the upper object (effect mode C in the example in the figure) or the lower object (effect mode A in the example in the figure). In the operation of changing the selected effect mode, the corresponding object is moved and displayed at the position of the selection cursor P857, and other selected objects are also followed and displayed in the same direction.

When the upper key of the cross key P383 is operated in the situation where the selection cursor P857 is located in the effect mode C in FIG. 49, in other words, it becomes an effect unopened object such as the selection target object P856 related to the effect mode D. When the operation for aligning the selection cursor P857 is performed, the selection cursor P857 is located on the selection target object P856 related to the effect mode D, but it is not determined even if the effect button is operated, and a voice indicating that the selection cannot be made is output. The selection target object P856 related to the effect mode D may be skipped, and the selection cursor P857 may be located on the selection target object P856 (for example, the selection target object P856 related to the effect mode E). You may.

A character string "random" and a character string "recommended" are displayed on the sides of the left key and right key images of the cross key image P883. That is, while the effect mode selection effect is being executed (the image is being displayed in FIG. 49), the effect content (effect mode) can be selected by the "random selection function" by operating the left key, and "recommended" by operating the right key. It is shown that the effect content (effect mode) can be selected by the effect selection function. The "random selection function" and "recommended production selection function" will be described in detail later.

Explanation of selection method Below the image display area P858, the remaining time display P859 (select the mode_remaining XX seconds) is displayed, and the remaining time for which the selection operation of the effect mode selection effect is valid input is performed. It informs that it is XX seconds. At the timing when the remaining time display becomes "0 seconds", the operation is the same as when the effect button P381 is operated at that timing. For example, when the remaining time display is "0 seconds" in the example of FIG. 49, the effect mode B selected by the selection cursor P857 is selected as the effect mode in the specific gaming state. Not limited to this, when the remaining time display is "0 seconds" in the example of FIG. 49, the effect mode set as the initial setting of the gaming machine is selected regardless of the position of the selection cursor P857. It may be configured, or it may be configured so that the effect mode determined last time is determined.

When the effect content determination operation is performed under the situation shown in FIG. 49, the display for which the effect mode of the selection target object P856 selected by the selection cursor P857 is determined is selected. This is done by enlarging the object P856 (for example, full screen display). It should be noted that the selection target object P856 is enlarged and displayed when the operation of determining the effect content is performed, while the selection target object P856 is not enlarged and displayed when the above-mentioned remaining time display is "0 seconds". You may.

《Random selection function》
FIG. 50 shows a process of randomly selecting one effect content based on a random number or the like acquired at the timing of a button operation for the effect content (effect mode) of the selectable object P856. It is a display example which shows the execution mode of the function which performs.

In the screen display of FIG. 50, whether or not the pop-up window P860 is displayed in the substantially central area of the screen by operating the left key of the cross key P383 during the screen display of FIG. 49 and the effect content is selected by the random selection function. Is displayed so that the player can select.

The pop-up window P860 in the random selection function of FIG. 50 is notified that the "random selection function" is being executed by the character string "random" in the upper left, and can be selected as the selection target object P856 on the left side of the screen. An aspect in which the icon (character image used in the effect mode) indicating the effect content is switched at high speed is shown.

The pop-up window is displayed so as to overlap most of the selection method explanation image display area P858 in FIG. 49, and a new selection method explanation image display area P858 is displayed inside the pop-up window (lower part of the screen). .. In the random selection function, by operating the effect button P381 while the pop-up window is displayed, the effect content (effect mode) determined by the lottery is displayed in the pop-up window as the selected effect mode. In addition, after displaying the pop-up window of the random selection function, if the effect content is undecided, the player operates the right key of the cross key P383 to cancel the random selection function (close the pop-up window). ) It is configured to be controlled.

As shown in FIG. 50, the pop-up window of the random selection function is designed to display the remaining time display P859 at a position that does not cover the display, so that the player can recognize the remaining time of the effect mode selection effect. When the display of the pop-up window display is configured to be displayed in a size larger than the example of FIG. 50, the remaining time display may be moved to the inside of the pop-up window, or the pop-up window may be displayed from the position shown in FIG. May be controlled to move to a position where they do not overlap (may be controlled so that the player can recognize the remaining time). When the remaining time display becomes "0 seconds" during the pop-up window display of the random selection function, it is treated as if the effect button P381 was operated during the random selection function.

When the effect content is determined by the random selection function shown in FIG. 50, the pop-up window displayed by the random selection function is enlarged (for example, full screen display) to display the selected effect content. Notify. It should be noted that the notification effect by the enlarged display of the effect determined by the random selection function has the same display mode as the notification mode at the time of determining the effect content based on the normal selection operation of the effect mode selection effect shown in FIG. It is configured. As a modification, it is issued at the time of determination when the effect content is determined in the screen state of FIG. 49 and when the effect content is determined by the random selection function (or the "recommended effect selection function" described later). The lines of the characters may be different, or the action patterns of the character images may be different. Even if the same production is selected, it is possible to provide a variety of productions with different decision productions and enhance the interest.

It should be noted that, as in the effect mode D of FIG. 49 described above, the effect content to be drawn when the effect button P381 is operated by the random selection function in a situation including an effect that has not yet been selectable. , The lottery process may be configured according to the number and types of production modes that can be selected, but the combination of the number and types of productions that are open to the player as selectable productions. Since the lottery table becomes complicated as the number of variations increases, the number of offsets (the total number of types of the selection target object P856 including the unopened effect contents N is set to N, and N, N-1, 2N, 2N-1 are the upper limits. The random value selected from the range to be selected) is determined, and before the pop-up window of the random selection function is opened, the effect content selected as the selection target object P856 at the position of the selection cursor P857 is upward (or downward). ) May be configured to select the same effect mode as when the operation is performed for the number of offsets. With this configuration, even in the situation where there is an unopened effect content that is a non-selection target, the selection target object P856 is skipped and the next selection target object P856 is selected as in the normal selection operation. Since it is only necessary to perform the same processing as the processing such as positioning the cursor P857, the lottery processing of the random selection function and the determination processing of the selection effect content can be configured to be simple.

<< Recommended production selection function >>
Next, the "recommended effect selection function" will be described with reference to FIG. 51. The "recommended effect selection function" presents the effect content selected based on random or predetermined selection criteria among the currently selectable effect contents to the player together with the explanation text (mode explanation), and the player. It is a production that lets you select whether or not to select. When the effect content to be displayed is randomly selected, it can be said that the above-mentioned random selection function differs from the above-mentioned random selection function in whether or not the effect content selected before the operation of the effect button P381 is known.

On the other hand, the displayed effect content may be configured to be displayed according to a predetermined selection criterion (selection method). For example, the following selection criteria (selection method) can be examined.
(1) Using a circuit component that clocks the date and time, such as an RTC (real-time clock), it is configured so that the display contents can be sequentially switched using the date information and the time information.
(2) It is possible to set the effect content to be displayed as the recommended effect content from the menu displayed by the operation procedure that can be executed only by the manager of the game store (for example, opening the glass frame and operating the effect button P381). Configure to. (Multiple settings may be made, and it may be configured to be displayed in order for each big hit game)
(3) The variation effect pattern determined by the effect determination process in the variation display (big hit variation) of the special symbol that started the jackpot game (effect mode selection effect) is highly relevant (for example, an active character, etc.). ) Configure to display the effect mode.
(4) The effect mode is set so as to have a series of effect patterns and a variation effect pattern determined by the effect determination process in the variation display (big hit variation) of the special symbol that has started the jackpot game (effect mode selection effect). Configure to display.

The screen display example in the "recommended effect selection function" is similar to the random selection function shown in FIG. 50, and the pop-up window screen includes the characters "recommended" indicating that the "recommended effect selection function" is being executed. , The character string of "production mode X" which is the selection candidate (recommended production content) this time, the icon display corresponding to the production mode X, and the mode explanation of the production mode X are displayed, and the selection method explanation image display area P858 is displayed. It is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

In recent gaming machines, there are cases where a large number of production contents can be selected, and the story of animation, manga, etc., which is the motif of the production of the gaming machine, and the subject matter (theme) such as characters are well known. It is conceivable that a player who does not have a player has a poor understanding of the production contents that can be selected, and is confused about the selection of the production contents. Therefore, if it is configured so that an explanation about the content of the production can be presented for one production mode, as in the "recommended production selection function" in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the content can be understood and produced. Can assist in making choices. As shown in FIG. 49, although the display area of the selection target object P856 is configured to include the display related to the mode explanation, the mode explanation is read and selected for the all selection target object P856. This is difficult, and there is a risk that only the effect selected by the current selection cursor P857 will be selected without the trouble of checking each time. Even for such problems, if the content of 1 is displayed as a "recommended production selection function" by a simple operation, after understanding the content as a trial for a new production. It will be possible to execute it, and it is expected that the player will have a deeper understanding of the production of the pachinko gaming machine and will be able to enjoy the production more.

As described above, in the "effect mode selection effect" in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the relative position of the normal selection operation (selection cursor P857 by the up key and down key of the cross key P383 and the selection target object P856 is set. In addition to the operation of switching and selecting, the "random selection function" and "recommended production selection function" can be executed as functions to easily assist the player's selection operation. With such a configuration, the number of selectable production contents increases, and even if the player is at a loss for the selection operation or is uncomfortable, the simple operation has never been seen before. The mode can be selected, and it is possible to create an opportunity to see a new production.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the "random selection function" and the "recommended effect selection function" are executed as auxiliary selection functions in the selection effect of selecting one effect content from a plurality of effect contents. Although it is possible, it may be configured to be feasible by assigning other auxiliary selection functions as shown below to the control based on the operation of the operation means P81.

<< Examples of other auxiliary selection functions >>
(1) The most selected production since the pachinko machine was installed (the most popular production selection).
(2) The most selected production within the last two weeks (recent trend selection).
(3) The most selected production during the period when the cooperation function using the password issued from the server managed by the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine, the terminal information owned by the player, the registration information, etc. is operating. (Personal favorite production selection).
(4) Select the previously selected effect (* Only when the control is adopted in which the relative position of the selection cursor P857 and the selection target object P856 is the position to select the new effect when a new effect is opened). ..
It should be noted that the functions such as (1) and (2) are predetermined for one selection for the effect that cannot be selected until the condition is satisfied as in the effect mode D in FIG. 49 in the second embodiment. There may be a difference in the addition method between the effect and the effect that can always be selected, such as multiplying by a coefficient and counting.

The selection effect described in the second embodiment and the modified example is not limited to the effect mode selection effect during the big hit, but as a control during display of the menu screen effect executed based on the operation of the operation means P81 during non-game. Is also applicable, and may be applied to the effect displayed during the execution of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol. In addition to the production mode, the production content includes selection of images such as the background of some production areas, selection of BGM to be played back, selection of production customization content that makes the tendency of production execution and production decision different, and the like. Is also applicable.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment has three characteristic effects using the operation means P81: "battle effect A", "battle effect B", and "effect mode selection effect". We explained two effects, but if they have the same control of button effects, the effect mode is a battle effect in which the player side character (PLAYER) and the enemy character (ENEMY) fight, or a specific effect during a big hit game. It can also be applied to effects other than the effect mode of selecting the effect mode in the gaming state.

Further, in the second embodiment as a player operation effect using the operation means P81 in a game machine other than the pachinko game machine, for example, a spinning machine (slot machine), a Jiyan ball game machine, a casino machine, or the like. The effect control of the characteristic player operation effect described above may be applied.

P pachinko game machine, P1 outer frame, P2 front frame, P3 glass frame,
P4 back set unit, P5 game board, P40 main control board,
P41 effect control board, P42 image control board, P43 payout control board,
P44 power supply board, P47 power switch, P48 ram clear switch,
P49 setting key switch, P50 main control display device,
P51 1st special symbol display device, P52 2nd special symbol display device,
P80 effect display device, P81 effect operation means (P380 effect operation unit,
P381 production button, P382 lever, P383 cross key),
P82 production lamp (P350 frame lamp, P550 board lamp),
P83 speaker (P141 curtain plate speaker, P371 upper speaker),
P560 Directing accessory, P710 1st start winning device,
P720 2nd start winning device, P730 general winning device,
P740 Normal electric accessory, P750 Large winning opening device P755 Special electric accessory, P770 Ordinary electric accessory

Claims (1)

The main control means to control the progress of the game,
The effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and the effect control means.
An effect device controlled by the effect control means and
An effect display means included in the effect device and performing a predetermined effect display,
An effect movable body included in the effect device and capable of performing a predetermined displacement operation, respectively.
An effect light emitting unit provided in the effect movable body and executing a predetermined light emission effect,
It is a gaming machine that has
The main control means executes a winning / failing lottery relating to whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied based on the progress of the game.
The effect control means is
An execution pattern can be selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns including a specific effect pattern as the effect execution pattern related to the result of the winning / failing lottery.
The specific effect pattern is an effect pattern having a first effect period and a second effect period after the first effect period.
In the first effect period, it is possible to execute the first effect period light emission effect that suggests the result of the winning / failing lottery by switching the light emission mode of the effect light emitting unit a plurality of times.
When the first effect period light emission effect is executed, the effect light emitting unit emits light related to the final light emission mode of the first effect period light emission effect until a predetermined timing during the execution of the second effect period. A gaming machine characterized in that it is an embodiment.

Images